TDA9381PS/N2 [NXP]

TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with embedded m-Controller;
TDA9381PS/N2
型号: TDA9381PS/N2
厂家: NXP    NXP
描述:

TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with embedded m-Controller

电视
文件: 总118页 (文件大小:490K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS  
DEVICE SPECIFICATION  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TV signal processor-Teletext  
decoder with embedded µ-Controller  
Tentative Device Specification  
2001 Jan 18  
Version: 2.8  
Previous date: 2000 Nov 29  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder  
with embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The various versions of theTDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
combine the functions of a TV signal processor together  
with a µ-Controller and US Closed Caption decoder. Most  
versions have a Teletext decoder on board. The Teletext  
decoder has an internal RAM memory for 1or 10 page text.  
The ICs are intended to be used in economy television  
receivers with 90° and 110° picture tubes.  
The ICs have supply voltages of 8 V and 3.3 V and they  
are mounted in S-DIP envelope with 64 pins.  
The features are given in the following feature list. The  
differences between the various ICs are given in the table  
on page 4.  
FEATURES  
RGB control circuit with ‘Continuous Cathode  
Calibration’, white point and black level offset  
adjustment so that the colour temperature of the dark  
and the light parts of the screen can be chosen  
independently.  
TV-signal processor  
Multi-standard vision IF circuit with alignment-free PLL  
demodulator  
Internal (switchable) time-constant for the IF-AGC circuit Linear RGB or YUV input with fast blanking for external  
RGB/YUV sources. The Text/OSD signals are internally  
supplied from the µ-Controller/Teletext decoder  
A choice can be made between versions with mono  
intercarrier sound FM demodulator and versions with  
QSS IF amplifier.  
Contrast reduction possibility during mixed-mode of  
OSD and Text signals  
The mono intercarrier sound versions have a selective  
FM-PLL demodulator which can be switched to the  
different FM sound frequencies (4.5/5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz).  
The quality of this system is such that the external  
band-pass filters can be omitted.  
Horizontal synchronization with two control loops and  
alignment-free horizontal oscillator  
Vertical count-down circuit  
Vertical driver optimized for DC-coupled vertical output  
stages  
Source selection between ‘internal’ CVBS and external  
CVBS or Y/C signals  
Horizontal and vertical geometry processing  
Integrated chrominance trap circuit  
Horizontal and vertical zoom function for 16 : 9  
applications  
Integrated luminance delay line with adjustable delay  
time  
Horizontal parallelogram and bow correction for large  
screen picture tubes  
Picture improvement features with peaking (with  
variable centre frequency and positive/negative  
overshoot ratio) and black stretching  
Low-power start-up of the horizontal drive circuit  
Integrated chroma band-pass filter with switchable  
centre frequency  
Only one reference (12 MHz) crystal required for the  
µ-Controller, Teletext- and the colour decoder  
PAL/NTSC or multi-standard colour decoder with  
automatic search system  
Internal base-band delay line  
2001 Jan 18  
2
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
µ-Controller  
Display  
80C51 µ-controller core standard instruction set and  
Teletext and Enhanced OSD modes  
timing  
Features of level 1.5 WST and US Close Caption  
Serial and Parallel Display Attributes  
1 µs machine cycle  
32 - 128Kx8-bit late programmed ROM  
Single/Double/Quadruple Width and Height for  
3 - 12Kx8-bit Auxiliary RAM (shared with Display and  
characters  
Acquisition)  
Scrolling of display region  
Interrupt controller for individual enable/disable with two  
level priority  
Variable flash rate controlled by software  
Enhanced display features including overlining,  
underlining and italics  
Two 16-bit Timer/Counter registers  
One 16 bit Timer with 8-bit Pre-scaler  
WatchDog timer  
Soft colours using CLUT with 4096 colour palette  
Globally selectable scan lines per row (9/10/13/16) and  
Auxiliary RAM page pointer  
16-bit Data pointer  
character matrix [12x10, 12x13, 12x16 (VxH)]  
Fringing (Shadow) selectable from N-S-E-W direction  
Fringe colour selectable  
Stand-by, Idle and Power Down (PD) mode  
14 bits PWM for Voltage Synthesis Tuning  
8-bit A/D converter  
Meshing of defined area  
Contrast reduction of defined area  
Cursor  
4 pins which can be programmed as general I/O pin,  
ADC input or PWM (6-bit) output  
Special Graphics Characters with two planes, allowing  
four colours per character  
Data Capture  
32 software redefinable On-Screen display characters  
Text memory for 0, 1 or 10 pages  
4 WST Character sets (G0/G2) in single device (e.g.  
In the 10 page versions inventory of transmitted Teletext  
pages stored in the Transmitted Page Table (TPT) and  
Subtitle Page Table (SPT)  
Latin, Cyrillic, Greek, Arabic)  
G1 Mosaic graphics, Limited G3 Line drawing  
characters  
Data Capture for US Closed Caption  
WST Character sets and Closed Caption Character set  
Data Capture for 525/625 line WST, VPS (PDC system  
in single device  
A) and Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) bit decoding  
Automatic selection between 525 WST/625 WST  
Automatic selection between 625 WST/VPS on line 16  
of VBI  
Real-time capture and decoding for WST Teletext in  
Hardware, to enable optimized µ-processor throughput  
Automatic detection of FASTEXT transmission  
Real-time packet 26 engine in Hardware for processing  
accented, G2 and G3 characters  
Signal quality detector for video and WST/VPS data  
types  
Comprehensive teletext language coverage  
Full Field and Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) data  
capture of WST data  
2001 Jan 18  
3
FUNCTIONAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE VARIOUS IC VERSIONS  
IC VERSION (TDA)  
TV range  
9350935193529353936093619362936393649365936693679380938193829383938493859386938793889389  
90° 90° 90° 110° 90° 90° 110° 110° 110° 110° 90° 90° 90° 90° 90° 110° 110° 110° 110° 90° 110° 110°  
Mono intercarrier multi-standard  
sound demodulator (4.5 - 6.5 MHz)  
with switchable centre frequency  
Audio switch  
Automatic Volume Levelling  
Automatic Volume Levelling or  
subcarrier output (for comb filter  
applications)  
QSS sound IF amplifier with  
separate input and AGC circuit  
AM sound demodulator without  
extra reference circuit  
PAL decoder  
SECAM decoder  
NTSC decoder  
Horizontal geometry (E-W)  
Horizontal and Vertical Zoom  
ROM size  
32- 32- 32- 32- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 64- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16- 16-  
64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 128k 128k 128k 128k 128k 128k 128k 128k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k 64 k  
User RAM size  
Teletext  
1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 2 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k 1 k  
1
1
1
1
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10  
pagepagepagepagepagepagepagepagepagepagepagepage  
Closed captioning  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
QUICK REFERENCE DATA  
SYMBOL  
Supply  
PARAMETER  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
VP  
IP  
supply voltages  
supply current  
8.0/3.3  
tbf  
V
mA  
Input voltages  
ViVIFrms)  
video IF amplifier sensitivity (RMS value)  
QSS sound IF amplifier sensitivity (RMS value)  
external audio input (RMS value)  
75  
µV  
µV  
mV  
V
ViSIF(rms)  
60  
ViAUDIO(rms)  
ViCVBS(p-p)  
500  
1.0  
0.3  
external CVBS/Y input (peak-to-peak value)  
ViCHROMA(p-p) external chroma input voltage (burst amplitude)  
(peak-to-peak value)  
V
ViRGB(p-p)  
ViYIN(p-p)  
ViUVIN(p-p)  
RGB inputs (peak-to-peak value)  
0.7  
1.4  
V
V
V
luminance input signal (peak-to-peak value)  
U/V input signal (peak-to-peak value)  
1.33/1.05 −  
Output signals  
Vo(IFVO)(p-p)  
demodulated CVBS output (peak-to-peak value)  
2.5  
V
Vo(QSSO)(rms) sound IF intercarrier output in QSS versions (RMS value)  
100  
500  
mV  
mV  
Vo(AMOUT)(rms) demodulated AM sound output in QSS versions (RMS  
value)  
Io(AGCOUT)  
VoRGB(p-p)  
IoHOUT  
tuner AGC output current range  
0
5
mA  
V
RGB output signal amplitudes (peak-to-peak value)  
horizontal output current  
2.0  
10  
1
mA  
mA  
mA  
IoVERT  
vertical output current (peak-to-peak value)  
EW drive output current  
IoEWD  
1.2  
2001 Jan 18  
5
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
BLOCK DIAGRAM  
1 + 6 2 - 6 4  
I / O P O R T S ( 4 x )  
5 - 8  
A D C I N ( 4 x )  
V S T O U T  
1 0 / 1 1  
L E D O U T ( 2 x )  
V P E  
R E S E T  
U A D O U T  
A U D E X T  
S N D I F  
2001 Jan 18  
6
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
1 + 6 2 - 6 4  
I / O P O R T S ( 4 x )  
5 - 8  
A D C I N ( 4 x )  
V S T O U T  
1 0 / 1 1  
L E D O U T ( 2 x )  
V P E  
R E S E T  
A M O U T  
Q S S O U T / A M O U T  
S I F I N  
( 2 0 )  
A U D E X T  
2001 Jan 18  
7
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
PINNING  
SYMBOL  
P1.3/T1  
PIN  
DESCRIPTION  
1
port 1.3 or Counter/Timer 1 input  
port 1.6 or I2C-bus clock line  
port 1.7 or I2C-bus data line  
port 2.0 or Tuning PWM output  
port 3.0 or ADC0 input  
P1.6/SCL  
P1.7/SDA  
P2.0/TPWM  
P3.0/ADC0  
P3.1/ADC1  
P3.2/ADC2  
P3.3/ADC3  
VSSC/P  
2
3
4
5
6
port 3.1 or ADC1 input  
7
port 3.2 or ADC2 input  
8
port 3.3 or ADC3 input  
9
digital ground for µ-Controller core and periphery  
port 0.5 (8 mA current sinking capability for direct drive of LEDs)  
port 0.6 (8 mA current sinking capability for direct drive of LEDs)  
analog ground of Teletext decoder and digital ground of TV-processor  
SECAM PLL decoupling  
2nd supply voltage TV-processor (+8V)  
decoupling digital supply of TV-processor  
phase-2 filter  
P0.5  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
P0.6  
VSSA  
SECPLL  
VP2  
DECDIG  
PH2LF  
PH1LF  
phase-1 filter  
GND3  
ground 3 for TV-processor  
DECBG  
AVL/EWD (1)  
bandgap decoupling  
Automatic Volume Levelling /East-West drive output  
vertical drive B output  
VDRB  
VDRA  
vertical drive A output  
IFIN1  
IF input 1  
IFIN2  
IF input 2  
IREF  
reference current input  
VSC  
vertical sawtooth capacitor  
TUNERAGC  
AUDEEM/SIFIN1(1)  
DECSDEM/SIFIN2(1)  
GND2  
SNDPLL/SIFAGC(1)  
AVL/SNDIF/REF0/  
AMOUT(1)  
HOUT  
tuner AGC output  
audio deemphasis or SIF input 1  
decoupling sound demodulator or SIF input 2  
ground 2 for TV processor  
narrow band PLL filter /AGC sound IF  
Automatic Volume Levelling / sound IF input / subcarrier reference output /AM output  
(non controlled)  
33  
34  
35  
horizontal output  
FBISO  
flyback input/sandcastle output  
AUDEXT/  
QSSO/AMOUT(1)  
EHTO  
external audio input /QSS intercarrier out /AM audio output (non controlled)  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
EHT/overvoltage protection input  
IF-PLL loop filter  
PLLIF  
IFVO/SVO  
VP1  
IF video output / selected CVBS output  
main supply voltage TV-processor (+8 V)  
internal CVBS input  
CVBSINT  
GND1  
ground 1 for TV-processor  
CVBS/Y  
external CVBS/Y input  
CHROMA  
AUDOUT /AMOUT(1)  
chrominance input (SVHS)  
audio output /AM audio output (volume controlled)  
2001 Jan 18  
8
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
SYMBOL  
INSSW2  
PIN  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
DESCRIPTION  
2nd RGB / YUV insertion input  
2nd R input / V (R-Y) input  
2nd G input / Y input  
R2/VIN  
G2/YIN  
B2/UIN  
BCLIN  
BLKIN  
RO  
2nd B input / U (B-Y) input  
beam current limiter input / (V-guard input, note 2)  
black current input / (V-guard input, note 2)  
Red output  
GO  
Green output  
BO  
Blue output  
VDDA  
analog supply of Teletext decoder and digital supply of TV-processor (3.3 V)  
OTP Programming Voltage  
digital supply to core (3.3 V)  
oscillator ground supply  
VPE  
VDDC  
OSCGND  
XTALIN  
XTALOUT  
RESET  
VDDP  
crystal oscillator input  
crystal oscillator output  
reset  
digital supply to periphery (+3.3 V)  
port 1.0 or external interrupt 1 input  
port 1.1 or Counter/Timer 0 input  
port 1.2 or external interrupt 0 input  
P1.0/INT1  
P1.1/T0  
P1.2/INT0  
Note  
1. The function of pin 20, 28, 29, 31, 32, 35 and 44 is dependent on the IC version (mono intercarrier FM demodulator  
/ QSS IF amplifier and East-West output or not) and on some software control bits. The valid combinations are given  
in table 1.  
2. The vertical guard function can be controlled via pin 49 or pin 50. The selction is made by means of the IVG bit in  
subaddress 2BH.  
Table 1  
Pin functions for various versions  
FM-PLL version  
IC version  
QSS version  
East-West Y/N  
CMB1/CMB0 bits  
AM bit  
N
Y
N
Y
00  
01/10/11  
00  
01/10/11  
00  
01/10/11  
00  
01/10/11  
0
1
0
1
Pin 20  
AVL  
EWD  
AVL  
EWD  
Pin 28  
AUDEEM  
SIFIN1  
SIFIN2  
Pin 29  
DECSDEM  
Pin 31  
SNDPLL  
SIFAGC  
AMOUT  
Pin 32  
SNDIF(1) REFO(2) AVL/SNDIF(1) REFO(2) AMOUT  
REFO(2)  
REFO(2)  
Pin 35  
AUDEXT  
AUDOUT  
AUDEXT QSSO AMOUT AUDEXT QSSO AMOUT  
controlled AM or audio out  
Pin 44  
Note  
1. When additional (external) selectivity is required for FM-PLL system pin 32 can be used as sound IF input. This  
function is selected by means of SIF bit in subaddress 28H.  
2. The reference output signal is only available for the CMB1/CMB0 setting of 0/1. For the other settings this pin is a  
switch output (see also table 67).  
2001 Jan 18  
9
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
handbook, halfpage  
P1.3/T1  
1
64  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
P1.2/INT0  
P1.1/T0  
P1.0/INT1  
VDDP  
2
P1.6/SCL  
P1.7/SDA  
P2.0/TPMW  
3
4
5
P3.0/ADC0  
P3.1/ADC1  
RESET  
6
XTALOUT  
7
P3.2/ADC2  
P3.3/ADC3  
XTALIN  
OSCGND  
8
VSSC/P  
P0.5  
9
VDDC  
VPE  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
P0.6  
VDDA  
VSSA  
BO  
GO  
SECPLL  
RO  
VP2  
DECDIG  
BLKIN  
BCLIN  
B2/UIN  
PH2LF  
PH1LF  
GND3  
G2/YIN  
R2/VIN  
INSSW2  
DECBG  
AVL/EWD  
AUDOUT/AMOUT  
CHROMA  
VDRB  
VDRA  
CVBS/Y  
IFIN1  
IFIN2  
IREF  
GND1  
CVBSINT  
VP1  
VSC  
IFVO/SVO  
TUNERAGC  
PLLIF  
EHTO  
AUDEEM/SIFIN1  
DECSDEM/SIFIN2  
AUDEXT/QSSO/  
AMOUT  
GND2  
SNDPLL/SIFAGC  
FBISO  
HOUT  
AVL/SNDIF/  
REFO/AMOUT  
MXXxxx  
Fig. 3 Pin configuration (SDIP 64)  
10  
2001 Jan 18  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 80C51  
the 32K banks is common and is always addressable. The  
other three banks (Bank0, Bank1, Bank2) can be  
accessed by selecting the right bank via the SFR ROMBK  
bits 1/0.  
The functionality of the micro-controller used on this  
device is described here with reference to the industry  
standard 80C51 micro-controller. A full description of its  
functionality can be found in the 80C51 based 8-bit  
micro-controllers - Philips Semiconductors (ref. IC20).  
FFFFH  
FFFFH  
FFFFH  
Features of the 80c51  
80C51 micro-controller core standard instruction set and  
Bank1  
32K  
Bank0  
32K  
Bank2  
32K  
timing.  
1µs machine cycle.  
8000H  
8000H  
8000H  
Maximum 128K x 8-bit Program ROM.  
Maximum of 12K x 8-bit Auxiliary RAM.  
2K (OSD only version) Auxiliary RAM, maximum  
of 1.25K required for Display  
7FFFH  
3K (1 page teletext version) Auxiliary RAM,  
maximum of 2K required for Display  
Common  
32K  
12K (10 page teletext version) Auxiliary RAM,  
maximum of 10K required for Display  
0000H  
8-Level Interrupt Controller for individual enable/disable  
Fig.4 ROM Bank Switching memory map  
with two level priority.  
Two 16-bit Timer/Counters.  
Additional 16-bit Timer with 8-bit Pre-scaler.  
WatchDog Timer.  
RAM Organisation  
The Internal Data RAM is organised into two areas, Data  
Memory and Special Function Registers (SFRs) as shown  
in Fig.5.  
Auxiliary RAM Page Pointer.  
16-bit Data pointer  
Idle, Stand-by and Power-Down modes.  
13 General I/O.  
FFH  
Accessible  
by Indirect  
Addressing  
only  
Accessible  
by Direct  
Addressing  
only  
Upper  
128  
Four 6-bit Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) outputs for  
control of TV analogue signals.  
One 14-bit PWM for Voltage Synthesis tuner control.  
8-bit ADC with 4 multiplexed inputs.  
80H  
7FH  
Accessible  
by Direct  
and Indirect  
Addressing  
Lower  
128  
2 high current outputs for directly driving LED’s etc.  
I2C Byte Level bus interface.  
00H  
Memory Organisation  
Data Memory  
Special Function Registers  
The device has the capability of a maximum of 128K Bytes  
of PROGRAM ROM and 12K Bytes of DATA RAM. The  
OSD (& Closed Caption) only version has a 2K RAM and  
a maximum of 64K ROM, the 1 page teletext version has  
a 3K RAM and also a maximum of 64K ROM whilst the 10  
page teletext version has a 12K RAM and a maximum of  
128K ROM.  
Fig.5 Internal Data Memory  
DATA MEMORY  
The Data memory is 256 x 8-bits and occupies the address  
range 00 to FF Hex when using Indirect addressing and 00  
to 7F Hex when using direct addressing. The SFRs occupy  
the address range 80 Hex to FF Hex and are accessible  
using Direct addressing only. The lower 128 Bytes of Data  
memory are mapped as shown in Fig.6. The lowest 32  
ROM Organisation  
The 64K device has a continuous address space from 0 to  
64K. The 128K is arranged in four banks of 32K. One of  
2001 Jan 18  
11  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
bytes are grouped into 4 banks of 8 registers, the next 16 bytes above the register banks form a block of bit addressable  
memory space. The upper 128 bytes are not allocated for any special area or functions.  
7FH  
2FH  
Bank Select  
Bits in PSW  
20H  
1FH  
11 = BANK3  
18H  
17H  
10 = BANK2  
10H  
0FH  
01 = BANK1  
08H  
07H  
00 = BANK0  
00H  
Fig.6 Lower 128 Bytes of Internal RAM  
SFR MEMORY  
The Special Function Register (SFR) space is used for port latches, counters/timers, peripheral control, data capture and  
display. These registers can only be accessed by direct addressing. Sixteen of the addresses in the SFR space are both  
bit and byte addressable. The bit addressable SFRs are those whose address ends in 0H or 8H. A summary of the SFR  
map in address order is shown in Table 2.  
ADD  
80H  
81H  
82H  
83H  
84H  
85H  
87H  
88H  
89H  
8AH  
8BH  
8CH  
8DH  
90H  
91H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Names  
P0  
BIT7  
Reserved  
SP<7>  
DPL<7>  
DPH<7>  
-
BIT6  
P0<6>  
SP<6>  
DPL<6>  
DPH<6>  
-
BIT5  
P0<5>  
SP<5>  
DPL<5>  
DPH<5>  
-
BIT4  
Reserved  
SP<4>  
DPL<4>  
DPH<4>  
-
BIT3  
Reserved  
SP<3>  
DPL<3>  
DPH<3>  
-
BIT2  
Reserved  
SP<2>  
DPL<2>  
DPH<2>  
-
BIT1  
Reserved  
SP<1>  
DPL<1>  
DPH<1>  
-
BIT0  
Reserved  
SP<0>  
DPL<0>  
DPH<0>  
ET2  
SP  
DPL  
DPH  
IEN1  
IP1  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PT2  
PCON  
TCON  
TMOD  
TL0  
0
ARD  
RFI  
WLE  
GF1  
GF0  
PD  
IDL  
TF1  
TR1  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
GATE  
TL0<7>  
TL1<7>  
TH0<7>  
TH1<7>  
P1<7>  
TP2L<7>  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
GATE  
TL0<3>  
TL1<3>  
TH0<3>  
TH1<3>  
P1<3>  
TP2L<3>  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
TL0<6>  
TL1<6>  
TH0<6>  
TH1<6>  
P1<6>  
TP2L<6>  
TL0<5>  
TL1<5>  
TH0<5>  
TH1<5>  
Reserved  
TP2L<5>  
TL0<4>  
TL1<4>  
TH0<4>  
TH1<4>  
Reserved  
TP2L<4>  
TL0<2>  
TL1<2>  
TH0<2>  
TH1<2>  
P1<2>  
TP2L<2>  
TL0<1>  
TL1<1>  
TH0<1>  
TH1<1>  
P1<1>  
TP2L<1>  
TL0<0>  
TL1<0>  
TH0<0>  
TH1<0>  
P1<0>  
TP2L<0>  
TL1  
TH0  
TH1  
P1  
TP2L  
Table 2 SFR Map  
2001 Jan 18  
12  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
ADD  
92H  
93H  
94H  
96H  
97H  
98H  
9CH  
9DH  
9EH  
9FH  
A0H  
A6H  
A7H  
A8H  
B0H  
B2H  
B3H  
B4H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
Names  
TP2H  
BIT7  
TP2H<15>  
TP2PR<7>  
-
BIT6  
TP2H<14>  
TP2PR<6>  
-
BIT5  
TP2H<13>  
TP2PR<5>  
-
BIT4  
TP2H<12>  
TP2PR<4>  
-
BIT3  
TP2H<11>  
TP2PR<3>  
-
BIT2  
TP2H<10>  
TP2PR<2>  
-
BIT1  
BIT0  
TP2H<9>  
TP2PR<1>  
TP2CRL<1>  
Reserved  
TP2H<8>  
TP2PR<0>  
TP2CRL<0>  
Reserved  
TP2PR  
TP2CRL  
P0CFGA  
P0CFGB  
SADB  
P0CFGA<6>  
P0CFGA<5>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
DC_COMP  
TP2CL<4>  
TP2CH<4>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
SAD<3>  
TP2CL<3>  
TP2CH<3>  
P1CFGA<3>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
SAD<2>  
TP2CL<2>  
TP2CH<2>  
P1CFGA<2>  
P0CFGB<6>  
-
P0CFGB<5>  
-
Reserved  
Reserved  
SAD<1>  
SAD<0>  
TP2CL  
TP2CH  
P1CFGA  
P1CFGB  
P2  
TP2CL<7>  
TP2CH<7>  
P1CFGA<7>  
TP2CL<6>  
TP2CH<6>  
P1CFGA<6>  
TP2CL<5>  
TP2CH<5>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
-
TP2CL<1>  
TP2CH<1>  
P1CFGA<1>  
TP2CL<0>  
TP2CH<0>  
P1CFGA<0>  
R
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
P1CFGB<7>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
EA  
P1CFGB<6>  
-
P1CFGB<3>  
-
P1CFGB<2>  
-
P1CFGB<1>  
-
P1CFGB<0>  
P2<0>  
P2CFGA<6>  
P2CFGA<5>  
P2CFGA<4>  
P2CFGA<3>  
P2CFGA<2>  
P2CFGA<1>  
P2CFGA<0>  
P2CFGA  
P2CFGB  
IE  
P2CFGB<6>  
EBUSY  
P2CFGB<5>  
ES2  
P2CFGB<4>  
ECC  
P2CFGB<3>  
P2CFGB<2>  
P2CFGB<1>  
ET0  
P2CFGB<0>  
EX0  
ET1  
EX1  
P3  
Reserved  
NOT<3>  
TEN  
Reserved  
NOT<2>  
TC<2>  
Reserved  
NOT<1>  
TC<1>  
0
Reserved  
NOT<0>  
TC<0>  
0
P3<3>  
P3<2>  
P3<1>  
P3<0>  
TXT18  
TXT19  
TXT20  
0
0
0
0
BS<1>  
TS<1>  
BS<0>  
TS<0>  
DRCS  
ENABLE  
OSD  
PLANES  
OSD LANG  
ENABLE  
OSD  
LAN<2>  
OSD  
LAN<1>  
OSD  
LAN<0>  
B5H  
R/W  
TXT21  
DISP  
DISP  
CHAR  
CHAR  
Reserved  
CC ON  
I2C PORT0  
CC/TXT  
LINE<1>  
LINES<0>  
SIZE<1>  
SIZE<0>  
B6H  
B7H  
B8H  
B9H  
R
TXT22  
CCLIN  
IP  
GPF1<7>  
GPF1<6>  
0
GPF1<5>  
0
GPF1<4>  
CS<4>  
PCC  
GPF1<3>  
CS<3>  
PT1  
GPF1<2>  
CS<2>  
PX1  
GPF1<1>  
CS<1>  
PT0  
GPF1<0>  
CS<0>  
PX0  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
PBUSY  
PES2  
TXT17  
FORCE  
ACQ<1>  
FORCE  
ACQ<0>  
FORCE  
DISP<1>  
FORCE  
DISP<0>  
SCREEN  
COL<2>  
SCREEN  
COL<1>  
SCREEN  
COL<0>  
BAH  
BBH  
BCH  
R
R
R
WSS1  
WSS2  
WSS3  
0
0
0
0
0
0
WSS<3:0>  
ERROR  
WSS<3>  
WSS<7>  
WSS<2>  
WSS<6>  
WSS<10>  
WSS<1>  
WSS<5>  
WSS<9>  
WSS<0>  
WSS<4>  
WSS<8>  
WSS<7:4>  
ERROR  
WSS<13:11>  
ERROR  
WSS<13>  
WSS<12>  
WSS<11>  
WSS<10:8>  
ERROR  
P3CFGA<3>  
P3CFGA<2>  
P3CFGA<1>  
P3CFGB<1>  
VPS ON  
P3CFGA<0>  
P3CFGB<0>  
INV ON  
BEH  
BFH  
C0H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
P3CFGA  
P3CFGB  
TXT0  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
P3CFGB<3>  
P3CFGB<2>  
X24 POSN  
DISPLAY  
X24  
AUTO  
FRAME  
DISABLE  
HEADER  
ROLL  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
ROW ONLY  
DISABLE  
FRAME  
Table 2 SFR Map  
2001 Jan 18  
13  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
ADD  
R/W  
Names  
TXT1  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
C1H  
R/W  
EXT PKT  
OFF  
8 BIT  
ACQ OFF  
X26 OFF  
FULL  
FIELD  
FIELD  
POLARITY  
H
V
POLARITY  
POLARITY  
C2H  
C3H  
C4H  
R/W  
W
TXT2  
TXT3  
TXT4  
ACQ BANK  
-
REQ<3>  
-
REQ<2>  
-
REQ<1>  
PRD<4>  
REQ<0>  
PRD<3>  
SC<2>  
SC<1>  
SC<0>  
PRD<2>  
PRD<1>  
PRD<0>  
R/W  
OSD BANK  
ENABLE  
QUAD  
WIDTH  
ENABLE  
EAST/WES  
T
DISABLE  
DOUBLE  
HEIGHT  
B MESH  
ENABLE  
C MESH  
ENABLE  
TRANS  
ENABLE  
SHADOW  
ENABLE  
C5H  
C6H  
C7H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
TXT5  
TXT6  
TXT7  
BKGND  
OUT  
BKGND IN  
BKGND IN  
CORB OUT  
CORB OUT  
REVEAL  
CORB IN  
CORB IN  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT IN  
TEXT IN  
PICTURE  
ON OUT  
PICTURE  
ON IN  
BKGND  
OUT  
PICTURE  
ON OUT  
PICTURE  
ON IN  
STATUS  
ROW TOP  
CURSOR  
ON  
BOTTOM/  
TOP  
DOUBLE  
HEIGHT  
BOX ON 24  
BOX ON  
1-23  
BOX ON 0  
C8H  
C9H  
R/W  
R/W  
TXT8  
TXT9  
(Reserved)  
0
FLICKER  
STOP ON  
HUNT  
A0  
DISABLE  
SPANISH  
PKT 26  
RECEIVED  
WSS  
RECEIVED  
WSS ON  
R<1>  
CVBS1/  
CVBS0  
CURSOR  
FREEZE  
CLEAR  
MEMORY  
R<4>  
R<3>  
R<2>  
R<0>  
CAH  
CBH  
CCH  
R/W  
R/W  
R
TXT10  
TXT11  
TXT12  
0
0
C<5>  
D<5>  
C<4>  
D<4>  
C<3>  
D<3>  
C<2>  
D<2>  
C<1>  
D<1>  
1
C<0>  
D<0>  
D<7>  
D<6>  
525/625  
SYNC  
ROM  
VER<4>  
ROM  
VER<3>  
ROM  
VER<2>  
ROM  
VER<1>  
ROM  
VER<0>  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
QUALITY  
CDH  
CEH  
R/W  
R/W  
TXT14  
TXT15  
0
0
0
0
0
0
DISPLAY  
BANK  
PAGE<3>  
PAGE<2>  
PAGE<1>  
PAGE<0>  
MICRO  
BANK  
BLOCK<3>  
BLOCK<2>  
BLOCK<1>  
BLOCK<0>  
D0H  
D2H  
D3H  
D5H  
D6H  
D7H  
D8H  
D9H  
DAH  
DBH  
DCH  
E0H  
E4H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R
PSW  
C
AC  
F0  
RS1  
RS0  
OV  
-
P
TDACL  
TDACH  
PWM0  
PWM1  
CCDAT1  
S1CON  
S1STA  
S1DAT  
S1ADR  
PWM3  
ACC  
TD<7>  
TPWE  
TD<6>  
TD<5>  
TD<4>  
TD<3>  
TD<2>  
TD<1>  
TD<0>  
TD<8>  
PW0V<0>  
PW1V<0>  
CCD1<0>  
CR<0>  
0
1
1
TD<13>  
PW0V<5>  
PW1V<5>  
CCD1<5>  
STA  
TD<12>  
PW0V<4>  
PW1V<4>  
CCD1<4>  
STO  
TD<11>  
PW0V<3>  
PW1V<3>  
CCD1<3>  
SI  
TD<10>  
PW0V<2>  
PW1V<2>  
CCD1<2>  
AA  
TD<9>  
PW0E  
PW0V<1>  
PW1V<1>  
CCD1<1>  
CR<1>  
PW1E  
1
CCD1<7>  
CR<2>  
STAT<4>  
DAT<7>  
ADR<6>  
PW3E  
CCD1<6>  
ENSI  
STAT<3>  
DAT<6>  
ADR<5>  
1
R/W  
R
STAT<2>  
DAT<5>  
ADR<4>  
PW3V<5>  
ACC<5>  
PW2V<5>  
STAT<1>  
DAT<4>  
ADR<3>  
PW3V<4>  
ACC<4>  
PW2V<4>  
STAT<0>  
DAT<3>  
ADR<2>  
PW3V<3>  
ACC<3>  
PW2V<3>  
0
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
DAT<2>  
ADR<1>  
PW3V<2>  
ACC<2>  
PW2V<2>  
DAT<1>  
ADR<0>  
PW3V<1>  
ACC<1>  
PW2V<1>  
DAT<0>  
GC  
PW3V<0>  
ACC<0>  
PW2V<0>  
ACC<7>  
PW2E  
ACC<6>  
1
PWM2  
Table 2 SFR Map  
2001 Jan 18  
14  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
ADD  
E7H  
E8H  
F0H  
F8H  
R/W  
R
Names  
CCDAT2  
SAD  
BIT7  
CCD2<7>  
VHI  
BIT6  
CCD2<6>  
CH<1>  
B<6>  
BIT5  
CCD2<5>  
CH<0>  
B<5>  
BIT4  
CCD2<4>  
ST  
BIT3  
CCD2<3>  
SAD<7>  
B<3>  
BIT2  
CCD2<2>  
SAD<6>  
B<2>  
BIT1  
CCD2<1>  
SAD<5>  
B<1>  
BIT0  
CCD2<0>  
SAD<4>  
B<0>  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
B
B<7>  
B<4>  
TXT13  
VPS  
PAGE  
525  
525 TEXT  
625 TEXT  
PKT 8/30  
FASTEXT  
0
RECEIVED  
CLEARING  
DISPLAY  
FAH  
FBH  
FDH  
FEH  
FFH  
R/W  
R/W  
R
XRAMP  
ROMBK  
TEST  
XRAMP<7>  
STANDBY  
TEST<7>  
XRAMP<6>  
IIC_LUT<1>  
XRAMP<5>  
IIC_LUT<0>  
XRAMP<4>  
0
XRAMP<3>  
0
XRAMP<2>  
0
XRAMP<1>  
ROMBK<1>  
TEST<1>  
XRAMP<0>  
ROMBK<0>  
TEST<0>  
TEST<6>  
WKEY<6>  
WDV<6>  
TEST<5>  
WKEY<5>  
WDV<5>  
TEST<4>  
WKEY<4>  
WDV<4>  
TEST<3>  
WKEY<3>  
WDV<3>  
TEST<2>  
WKEY<2>  
WDV<2>  
W
WDTKEY  
WDT  
WKEY<7>  
WDV<7>  
WKEY<1>  
WDV<1>  
WKEY<0>  
WDV<0>  
R/W  
Table 2 SFR Map  
A description of each of the SFR bits is shown in Table 3, The SFRs are in alphabetical order.  
Names  
ACC  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
00H  
E0H  
ACC<7>  
ACC<6>  
ACC<5>  
ACC<4>  
ACC<3>  
ACC<2>  
ACC<1>  
ACC<0>  
ACC<7:0>  
Accumulator value.  
F0H B<7>  
B Register value.  
D7H CCD1<7>  
B
B<6>  
B<5>  
CCD1<5>  
CCD2<5>  
0
B<4>  
B<3>  
B<2>  
CCD1<2>  
CCD2<2>  
CS<2>  
B<1>  
CCD1<1>  
CCD2<1>  
CS<1>  
B<0>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
15H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
B<7:0>  
CCDAT1  
CCD1<7:0>  
CCDAT2  
CCD2<7:0>  
CCLIN  
CS<4:0>  
CCD1<6>  
CCD1<4>  
CCD2<4>  
CS<4>  
CCD1<3>  
CCD2<3>  
CS<3>  
CCD1<0>  
CCD2<0>  
CS<0>  
Closed Caption first data byte.  
E7H CCD2<7> CCD2<6>  
Closed Caption second data byte.  
B7H  
Closed Caption Slice line using 525 line number.  
83H DPH<7> DPH<6> DPH<5>  
0
0
DPH  
DPH<7:0>  
DPL  
DPL<7:0>  
DPH<4>  
DPH<3>  
DPH<2>  
DPL<2>  
EX1  
DPH<1>  
DPL<1>  
ET0  
DPH<0>  
DPL<0>  
EX0  
Data Pointer High byte, used with DPL to address display and auxiliary memory.  
82H DPL<7> DPL<6> DPL<5> DPL<4> DPL<3>  
Data pointer low byte, used with DPH to address display and auxiliary memory.  
A8H EA EBUSY ES2 ECC  
IE  
ET1  
EA  
EBUSY  
ES2  
Disable all interrupts (0), or use individual interrupt enable bits (1).  
Enable BUSY Interrupt.  
Enable I2C Interrupt.  
ECC  
Enable Closed Caption Interrupt.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
15  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ET1  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
Enable Timer 1 Interrupt.  
Enable External Interrupt 1.  
Enable Timer 0 Interrupt.  
Enable External Interrupt 0.  
EX1  
ET0  
EX0  
IEN1  
IP  
84H  
Enable Timer 2 Interrupt.  
B8H  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ET2  
PX0  
00H  
00H  
ET2  
0
PBUSY  
PES2  
PCC  
PT1  
PX1  
PT0  
PBUSY  
PES2  
PCC  
PT1  
Priority EBUSY Interrupt.  
Priority ES2 Interrupt.  
Priority ECC Interrupt.  
Priority Timer 1 Interrupt.  
Priority External Interrupt 1.  
Priority Timer 0 Interrupt.  
Priority External Interrupt 0.  
PX1  
PT0  
PX0  
IP1  
P0  
85H  
Priority Timer 2 Interrupt.  
80H Reserved  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PT2  
00H  
FFH  
FFH  
PT2  
P0<6>  
P0<5>  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
P1<3>  
Reserved  
P1<2>  
Reserved  
P1<1>  
Reserved  
P1<0>  
P0<6:5>  
Port 0 I/O register connected to external pins.  
90H P1<7> P1<6> Reserved  
P1  
P1<7:6>  
P1<3:0>  
Port 1 I/O register connected to external pins.  
Port 1 I/O register connected to external pins.  
P2  
P3  
A0H  
Port 2 I/O register connected to external pins.  
B0H Reserved Reserved Reserved  
Port 3 I/O register connected to external pins.  
Reserved  
P2<6>  
P2<5>  
P2<4>  
P2<3>  
P3<3>  
P2<2>  
P3<2>  
P2<1>  
P3<1>  
P2<0>  
P3<0>  
FFH  
FFH  
P2<6:0>  
P3<3:0>  
Reserved  
P0CFGA<6>  
P0CFGB<6>  
P0CFGA<5>  
P0CFGB<5>  
P0CFGA  
P0CFGB  
96H  
97H  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
FFH  
00H  
P0CFGB<x>/P0CFGA<x> = 00  
P0CFGB<x>/P0CFGA<x> = 01  
P0CFGB<x>/P0CFGA<x> = 10  
P0CFGB<x>/P0CFGA<x> = 11  
MODE 0 Open Drain.  
MODE 1 Quasi Bi-Directional.  
MODE2 High Impedance.  
MODE3 Push Pull.  
9EH  
9FH  
P1CFGA<7>  
P1CFGB<7>  
P1CFGA<6>  
Reserved  
P1CFGA<3>  
P1CFGB<3>  
P1CFGA<2>  
P1CFGB<2>  
P1CFGA<1>  
P1CFGB<1>  
P1CFGA<0>  
P1CFGB<0>  
P1CFGA  
P1CFGB  
Reserved  
Reserved  
FFH  
00H  
P1CFGB<6>  
Reserved  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
16  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
P1CFGB<x>/P1CFGA<x> = 00  
P1CFGB<x>/P1CFGA<x> = 01  
P1CFGB<x>/P1CFGA<x> = 10  
P1CFGB<x>/P1CFGA<x> = 11  
MODE 0 Open Drain.  
MODE 1 Quasi Bi-Directional.  
MODE2 High Impedance.  
MODE3 Push Pull.  
P2CFGA<6>  
P2CFGB<6>  
P2CFGA<5>  
P2CFGB<5>  
P2CFGA<4>  
P2CFGB<4>  
P2CFGA<3>  
P2CFGB<3>  
P2CFGA<2>  
P2CFGB<2>  
P2CFGA<1>  
P2CFGB<1>  
P2CFGA<0>  
P2CFGB<0>  
P2CFGA  
P2CFGB  
A6H  
A7H  
Reserved  
Reserved  
FFH  
00H  
P2CFGB<x>/P2CFGA<x> = 00  
P2CFGB<x>/P2CFGA<x> = 01  
P2CFGB<x>/P2CFGA<x> = 10  
P2CFGB<x>/P2CFGA<x> = 11  
MODE 0 Open Drain.  
MODE 1 Quasi Bi-Directional.  
MODE2 High Impedance.  
MODE3 Push Pull.  
P3CFGA<3>  
P3CFGB<3>  
P3CFGA<2>  
P3CFGB<2>  
P3CFGA<1>  
P3CFGB<1>  
P3CFGA<0>  
P3CFGB<0>  
P3CFGA  
P3CFGB  
BEH  
BFH  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
FFH  
00H  
P3CFGB<x>/P3CFGA<x> = 00  
P3CFGB<x>/P3CFGA<x> = 01  
P3CFGB<x>/P3CFGA<x> = 10  
P3CFGB<x>/P3CFGA<x> = 11  
MODE 0 Open Drain.  
MODE 1 Quasi Bi-directional.  
MODE2 High Impedance.  
MODE3 Push Pull.  
PCON  
87H  
SMOD  
ARD  
RFI  
WLE  
GF1  
GF0  
PD  
IDL  
00H  
SMOD  
ARD  
RFI  
UART Baud Rate Double Control.  
Auxiliary RAM Disable, All MOVX instructions access the external data memory.  
Disable ALE during internal access to reduce Radio Frequency Interference.  
Watch Dog Timer enable.  
WLE  
GF1  
GF0  
PD  
General purpose flag.  
General purpose flag.  
Power-down activation bit.  
IDL  
Idle mode activation bit.  
PSW  
D0H  
C
AC  
F0  
RS<1>  
RS<0>  
OV  
-
P
00H  
C
AC  
F0  
Carry Bit.  
Auxiliary Carry bit.  
Flag 0, General purpose flag.  
RS<1:0>  
Register Bank selector bits.  
RS<1:0> = 00, Bank0 (00H - 07H).  
RS<1:0> = 01, Bank1 (08H - 0FH).  
RS<1:0> = 10, Bank2 (10H - 17H).  
RS<1:0> = 11, Bank3 (18H - 1FH).  
OV  
Overflow flag.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
17  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ADD  
Parity bit.  
D5H  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
40H  
P
PWM0  
PW0E  
1
PW0V<5>  
PW0V<4>  
PW0V<3>  
PW0V<2>  
PW0V<1>  
PW0V<0>  
PW0E 0 - Disable Pulse Width Modulator 0.  
1 - Enable Pulse Width Modulator 0.  
PW0V<5:0>  
PWM1  
Pulse Width Modulator high time.  
D6H PW1E  
1
PW1V<5>  
PW2V<5>  
PW3V<5>  
IIC_LUT<0>  
PW1V<4>  
PW2V<4>  
PW3V<4>  
0
PW1V<3>  
PW2V<3>  
PW3V<3>  
0
PW1V<2>  
PW2V<2>  
PW3V<2>  
0
PW1V<1>  
PW2V<1>  
PW3V<1>  
ROMBK<1>  
PW1V<0>  
PW2V<0>  
PW3V<0>  
ROMBK<0>  
40H  
40H  
40H  
00H  
PW1E  
0 - Disable Pulse Width Modulator 1.  
1 - Enable Pulse Width Modulator 1.  
PW1V<5:0>  
PWM2  
Pulse Width Modulator high time.  
E4H  
PW2E  
1
PW2E  
0 - Disable Pulse Width Modulator 2.  
1 - Enable Pulse Width Modulator 2.  
PW2V<5:0>  
Pulse Width Modulator high time.  
PWM3  
DCH  
PW3E  
1
PW3E  
0 - Disable Pulse Width Modulator 3.  
1 - Enable Pulse Width Modulator 3.  
PW3V<5:0>  
ROMBK  
Pulse Width Modulator high time.  
IIC_LUT<1>  
FBH  
STANDBY  
STANDBY  
0 - Disable Stand-by Mode  
1 - Enable Stand-by Mode  
IIC_LUT<1:0  
>
IIC Lookup table selection:  
IIC_LUT<1:0>=00, 558 Normal Mode.  
IIC_LUT<1:0>=01, 558 Fast Mode.  
IIC_LUT<1:0>=10, 558 Slow Mode.  
IIC_LUT<1:0>=11, Reserved.  
ROMBK<1:0  
>
ROM Bank selection  
ROMBK<1:0>=00, Bank0  
ROMBK<1:0>=01, Bank1  
ROMBK<1:0>=10, Bank2  
ROMBK<1:0>=11, Reserved  
S1ADR  
ADR<6:0>  
GC  
DBH  
ADR<6>  
ADR<5>  
ADR<4>  
ADR<3>  
ADR<2>  
ADR<1>  
ADR<0>  
GC  
00H  
00H  
I2C Slave Address.  
0 - Disable I2C general call address.  
1 - Enable I2C general call address.  
S1CON  
D8H  
CR<2>  
ENSI  
STA  
STO  
SI  
AA  
CR<1>  
CR<0>  
CR<2:0>  
Clock rate bits.  
IIC rates are selectable (three tables)  
ENSI  
0 - Disable I2C interface.  
1 - Enable I2C interface.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
18  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
STA  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
START flag. When this bit is set in slave mode, the hardware checks the I2C bus and generates a START condition if the bus is free or after the bus  
becomes free. If the device operates in master mode it will generate a repeated START condition.  
STO  
SI  
STOP flag. If this bit is set in a master mode a STOP condition is generated. A STOP condition detected on the I2C bus clears this bit. This bit may also  
be set in slave mode in order to recover from an error condition. In this case no STOP condition is generated to the I2C bus, but the hardware releases  
the SDA and SCL lines and switches to the not selected receiver mode. The STOP flag is cleared by the hardware.  
Serial Interrupt flag. This flag is set and an interrupt request is generated, after any of the following events occur:  
-A START condition is generated in master mode.  
-The own slave address has been received during AA=1.  
-The general call address has been received while S1ADR.GC and AA=1.  
-A data byte has been received or transmitted in master mode (even if arbitration is lost).  
-A data byte has been received or transmitted as selected slave.  
A STOP or START condition is received as selected slave receiver or transmitter  
While the SI flag is set, SCL remains LOW and the serial transfer is suspened.SI must be reset by software.  
AA  
Assert Acknowledge flag. When this bit is set, an acknowledge is returned after any one of the following conditions  
-Own slave address is received.  
-General call address is received(S1ADR.GC=1).  
-A data byte is received, while the device is programmed to be a master receiver.  
-A data byte is received, while the device is selected slave receiver.  
When the bit is reset, no acknowledge is returned. Consequently, no interrupt is requested when the own address or general call address is received.  
S1DAT  
DAT<7:0>  
S1STA  
STAT<4:0>  
SAD  
DAH  
DAT<7>  
DAT<6>  
STAT<3>  
CH<1>  
DAT<5>  
STAT<2>  
CH<0>  
DAT<4>  
STAT<1>  
ST  
DAT<3>  
STAT<0>  
SAD<7>  
DAT<2>  
DAT<1>  
DAT<0>  
00H  
F8H  
00H  
I2C Data.  
D9H  
STAT<4>  
0
0
0
I2C Interface Status.  
E8H VHI  
SAD<6>  
SAD<5>  
SAD<4>  
VHI  
0 - Analogue input voltage less than or equal to DAC voltage.  
1 - Analogue input voltage greater then DAC voltage.  
CH<1:0>  
ADC Input channel select.  
CH<1:0> = 00,ADC3.  
CH<1:0> = 01,ADC0.  
CH<1:0> = 10,ADC1.  
CH<1:0> = 11,ADC2.  
ST  
Initiate voltage comparison between ADC input Channel and SADB<3:0> value.  
Note: Set by Software and reset by Hardware.  
SAD<7:4>  
Most Significant nibble of DAC input word  
SADB  
98H  
0
0
0
DC_COMP  
SAD<3>  
SAD<2>  
SAD<1>  
SAD<0>  
00H  
DC_COMP  
0 - Disable DC Comparator mode.  
1 - Enable DC Comparator mode.  
SAD<3:0>  
4-bit SAD value.  
SP  
81H  
Stack Pointer.  
88H TF1  
SP<7>  
SP<6>  
SP<5>  
SP<4>  
TR0  
SP<3>  
SP<2>  
SP<1>  
SP<0>  
07H  
00H  
SP<7>  
TCON  
TR1  
TF0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
TF1  
Timer 1 overflow Flag. Set by hardware on Timer/Counter overflow.Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
19  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
TR1  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
Timer 1 Run control bit. Set/Cleared by software to turn Timer/Counter on/off.  
TF0  
TR0  
IE1  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
Timer 0 overflow Flag. Set by hardware on Timer/Counter overflow.Cleared by hardware when processor vectors to interrupt routine.  
Timer 0 Run control bit. Set/Cleared by software to turn Timer/Counter on/off.  
Interrupt 1 Edge flag (both edges generate flag). Set by hardware when external interrupt edge detected.Cleared by hardware when interrupt processed.  
Interrupt 1 Type control bit. Set/Cleared by Software to specify edge/low level triggered external interrupts.  
Interrupt 0 Edge l flag. Set by hardware when external interrupt edge detected.Cleared by hardware when interrupt processed.  
Interrupt 0 Type flag.Set/Cleared by Software to specify falling edge/low level triggered external interrupts.  
TDACH  
D3H  
TPWE  
1
TD<13>  
TD<12>  
TD<11>  
TD<10>  
TD<9>  
TD<8>  
40H  
TPWE  
0 - Disable Tuning Pulse Width Modulator.  
1 - Enable Tuning Pulse Width Modulator.  
TD<13:8>  
Tuning Pulse Width Modulator High Byte.  
TDACL  
TD<7:0>  
D2H  
TD<7>  
TD<6>  
TD<5>  
TH0<5>  
TH1<5>  
TL0<5>  
TL1<5>  
TD<4>  
TH0<4>  
TH1<4>  
TL0<4>  
TL1<4>  
TD<3>  
TH0<3>  
TH1<3>  
TL0<3>  
TL1<3>  
TD<2>  
TH0<2>  
TH1<2>  
TL0<2>  
TL1<2>  
TD<1>  
TH0<1>  
TH1<1>  
TL0<1>  
TL1<1>  
TD<0>  
TH0<0>  
TH1<0>  
TL0<0>  
TL1<0>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
Tuning Pulse Width Modulator Low Byte.  
TH0  
TH0<7:0>  
TH1  
8CH  
Timer 0 high byte.  
8DH TH1<7>  
Timer 1 high byte.  
8AH TL0<7>  
Timer 0 low byte.  
TH0<7>  
TH0<6>  
TH1<6>  
TL0<6>  
TL1<6>  
TH1<7:0>  
TL0<7:0>  
TL1<7:0>  
TL0  
TL1  
8BH  
TL1<7>  
Timer 1 low byte.  
TMOD  
89H  
GATE  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
GATE  
C/T  
M1  
M0  
Timer / Counter 1  
Timer / Counter 0  
GATE  
C/T  
Gating Control Timer /Counter 1.  
Counter/Timer 1 selector.  
M1,M0  
Mode control bits Timer/Counter 1.  
M1,M0 = 00, 8 bit timer or 8 bit counter with divide by 32 pre-scaler.  
M1,M0 = 01, 16 bit time interval or event counter.  
M1,M0 = 10, 8 bit time interval or event counter with automatic reload upon overflow. Reload value stored in TH1.  
M1,M0 = 11, stopped.  
GATE  
C/T  
Gating control Timer/Counter 0.  
Counter/Timer 0 selector.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
20  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
M1,M0  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
Mode Control bits Timer/Counter 0.  
M1,M0 = 00, 8 bit timer or 8 bit counter with divide by 32 pre-scaler.  
M1,M0 = 01, 16 bit time interval or event counter.  
M1,M0 = 10, 8 bit time interval or event counter with automatic reload upon overflow. Reload value stored in TH0.  
M1,M0 = 11, one 8 bit time interval or event counter and one 8 bit time interval counter.  
TP2CL  
9CH  
Indicate the low byte of the Time 2 current value.  
9DH TP2CH<7> TP2CH<6> TP2CH<5>  
Indicate the high byte of the Time 2 current value.  
92H TP2H<7> TP2H<6> TP2H<5>  
Timer 2 high byte, never change unless updated by the software.  
91H TP2L<7> TP2L<6> TP2L<5> TP2L<4>  
Timer 2 low byte, never change unless updated by the software.  
93H TP2PR<7> TP2PR<6> TP2PR<5> TP2PR<4>  
Timer 2 Pre-scaler, never change unless updated by the software.  
TP2CL<7>  
TP2CL<6>  
TP2CL<5>  
TP2CL<4>  
TP2CH<4>  
TP2H<4>  
TP2CL<3>  
TP2CH<3>  
TP2H<3>  
TP2L<3>  
TP2PR<3>  
-
TP2CL<2>  
TP2CH<2>  
TP2H<2>  
TP2L<2>  
TP2PR<2>  
-
TP2CL<1>  
TP2CH<1>  
TP2H<1>  
TP2L<1>  
TP2CL<0>  
TP2CH<0>  
TP2H<0>  
TP2L<0>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
TP2CL<7:0>  
TP2CH  
TP2CH<7:0>  
TP2H  
TP2H<7:0>  
TP2L  
TP2L<7:0>  
TP2PR  
TP2PR<1>  
TP2CRL<1>  
TP2PR<0>  
TP2CRL<0>  
TP2H<7:0>  
TP2CRL  
TP2CRL<0>  
94H  
-
-
-
-
Timer 2 Control.  
0 - Timer 2 disabled.  
1 - Timer 2 enabled.  
TP2CRL<1>  
Timer 2 Status.  
0 - No Overflow.  
1 - Overflow.  
TEST  
FDH  
TEST<7>  
TEST<6>  
TEST<5>  
TEST<4>  
TEST<3>  
TEST<2>  
TEST<1>  
TEST<0>  
00H  
TEST<2:0>  
Program Type bit SEL<2:0>.  
011 - Display Dram test.  
001 - Acquisition1 test.  
010 - Acquisition2 test  
TEST<4:3>  
TEST<7:5>  
Functional test mode bits, set via mode select logic.  
Dram Size.  
000 - 1.5K x 16.  
001 - 2K x 16.  
010 - 6K x 16.  
011 - 7K x 16.  
100 - 12K x 16.  
101 - 14K x 16.  
110 - 1K x 16.  
111 - 11K x 16.  
TXT0  
C0H  
X24 POSN  
DISPLAY  
X24  
AUTO  
FRAME  
DISABLE  
HEADER  
ROLL  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
ROW  
DISABLE  
FRAME  
VPS ON  
INV ON  
00H  
ONLY  
X24 POSN  
0 - Store X/24 in extension memory  
1 - Store X/24 in basic page memory with packets 0 to 23  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
21  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
DISLAY X24  
0 - Display row 24 from basic page memory  
1 - Display row 24 from appropriate location in extension memory  
AUTO  
0 - Normal Frame output  
FRAME  
1 - Frame output is switched off automatically if any video displayed  
DISABLE  
HEADER  
ROLL  
0 - Write rolling headers and time to current display page  
1 - Disable writing of rolling headers and time to into memory  
DISPLAY  
STATUS  
ROW ONLY  
0 - Display normal page rows 0 to 24  
1- Display only row 24  
DISABLE  
FRAME  
0 - Normal Frame output  
1 - Force Frame output to be low (0)  
VPS ON  
INV ON  
0 - VPS acquisition off  
1 - VPS acquisition on  
0 - Inventory page off  
1 - Inventory page on  
TXT1  
C1H  
EXT PKT  
OFF  
8 BIT  
ACQ OFF  
ACQ OFF  
FULL  
FIELD  
FIELD  
POLARITY  
H
V
00H  
POLARITY  
POLARITY  
EXT PKT  
OFF  
0 - Acquire extension packets X/24,X/27,8/30/X  
1 - Disable acquisition of extension packets  
8 BIT  
ACQ OFF  
0 - Error check and/or correct packets 0 to 24  
1 - Disable checking of packets 0 to 24 written into memory  
0 - Write requested data into display memory  
1 - Disable writing of data into Display memory  
X26 OFF  
0 - Enable automatic processing of X/26 data  
1 - Disable automatic processing of X/26 data  
FULL FIELD  
0 - Acquire CC data only on selected line.  
1 - Acquire CC data on any TV line (for test purposes).  
FIELD  
POLARIY  
0 - Vsync pulse in first half of line during even field.  
1 - Vsync pulse in second half of line during even field.  
H POLARITY  
V POLARITY  
0 - Hsync reference edge is positive going  
1 - Hsync reference edge is negative going  
0 - Vsync reference edge is positive going  
1 - Vsync reference edge is negative going  
TXT2  
C2H  
ACQ  
REQ<3>  
REQ<2>  
REQ<1>  
REQ<0>  
SC<2>  
SC<1>  
SC<0>  
00H  
BANK  
ACQ_BANK  
0 - Select Acquisition bank 0  
1 - Select Acquisition bank 1  
REQ<3:0>  
SC<2:0>  
Page request  
Start column of page request  
C3H  
TXT3  
PRD<4>  
PRD<3>  
PRD<2>  
PRD<1>  
PRD<0>  
00H  
PRD<4:0>  
Page Request data  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
22  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
TXT4  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
00H  
EAST/WEST  
C4H  
OSD  
BANK  
ENABLE  
QUAD  
WIDTH  
ENABLE  
DISABLE  
DBL  
HEIGHT  
B MESH  
ENABLE  
C MESH  
ENABLE  
TRANS  
ENABLE  
SHADOW  
ENABLE  
OSD BANK  
ENABLE  
0 - Only alpha numeric OSD characters available, 32 locations  
1 - Alternate OSD location available via graphic attribute, additional 32 location  
QUAD  
WIDTH  
ENABLE  
0 - Disable display of Quadruple width characters  
1 - Enable display of Quadruple width characters  
EAST/WEST  
0 - Western language selection of character codes A0 to FF  
1 - Eastern character selection of character codes A0 to FF  
DISABLE  
DOUBLE  
HEIGHT  
0 - Allow normal decoding of double height characters  
1 - Disable normal decoding of double height characters  
B MESH  
ENABLE  
0 - Normal display of black background  
1 - Enable meshing of black background  
C MESH  
ENABLE  
0 - normal display of coloured background  
1 - Enable meshing of coloured background  
TRANS  
ENABLE  
0 - Display black background as normal  
1 - Display black background as video  
SHADOW  
ENABLE  
0 - Disable display of shadow/fringing  
1 - Display shadow/ fringe (default SE black)  
TXT5  
C5H  
BKGND  
OUT  
BKGND IN  
COR OUT  
COR IN  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT IN  
PICTURE  
ON OUT  
PICTURE  
ON IN  
03H  
BKGND OUT  
0 - Background colour not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - Background colour displayed outside teletext boxes  
BKGND IN  
COR OUT  
COR IN  
0 - Background colour not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - Background colour displayed inside teletext boxes  
0 - COR not active outside teletext and OSD boxes  
1 - COR active outside teletext and OSD boxes  
0 - COR not active inside teletext and OSD boxes  
1 - COR active inside teletext and OSD boxes  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT IN  
0 - TEXT not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - TEXT displayed outside teletext boxes  
0 - TEXT not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - TEXT displayed inside teletext boxes  
PICTURE ON  
OUT  
0 - VIDEO not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - VIDEO displayed outside teletext boxes  
PICTURE ON  
IN  
0 - VIDEO not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - VIDEO displayed inside teletext boxes  
TXT6  
C6H  
BKGND  
OUT  
BKGND IN  
COR OUT  
COR IN  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT IN  
PICTURE  
ON OUT  
PICTURE  
ON IN  
03H  
BKGND OUT  
0 - Background colour not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - Background colour displayed outside teletext boxes  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
23  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
BKGND IN  
0 - Background colour not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - Background colour displayed inside teletext boxes  
COR OUT  
COR IN  
0 - COR not active outside teletext and OSD boxes  
1 - COR active outside teletext and OSD boxes  
0 - COR not active inside teletext and OSD boxes  
1 - COR active inside teletext and OSD boxes  
TEXT OUT  
TEXT IN  
0 - TEXT not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - TEXT displayed outside teletext boxes  
0 - TEXT not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - TEXT displayed inside teletext boxes  
PICTURE ON  
OUT  
0 - VIDEO not displayed outside teletext boxes  
1 - VIDEO displayed outside teletext boxes  
PICTURE ON  
IN  
0 - VIDEO not displayed inside teletext boxes  
1 - VIDEO displayed inside teletext boxes  
TXT7  
C7H  
STATUS  
ROW TOP  
CURSOR  
ON  
REVEAL  
BOTTOM/  
TOP  
DOUBLE  
HEIGHT  
BOX ON 24  
BOX ON  
1-23  
BOX ON 0  
00H  
STATUS  
ROW TOP  
0 - Display memory row 24 information below teletext page (on display row 24)  
1 - Display memory row 24 information above teletext page (on display row 0)  
CURSOR ON  
REVEAL  
0 - Disable display of cursor  
1 - Display cursor at position given by TXT9 and TXT10  
0 - Display as spaces characters in area with conceal attribute set  
1 - Display characters in area with conceal attribute set  
BOTTOM/TO  
P
0 - Display memory rows 0 to 11 when double height bit is set  
1 - Display memory rows 12 to 23 when double height bit is set  
DOUBLE  
HEIGHT  
0 - Display each characters with normal height  
1 - Display each character as twice normal height.  
BOX ON 24  
BOX ON 1-23  
BOX ON 0  
TXT8  
0 - Disable display of teletext boxes in memory row 24  
1 - Enable display of teletext boxes in memory row 24  
0 - Disable display of teletext boxes in memory row 1 to 23  
1 - Enable display of teletext boxes in memory row 1 to 23  
0 - Disable display of teletext boxes in memory row 0  
1 - Enable display of teletext boxes in memory row 0  
C8H  
(Reserved)  
0
FLICKER  
STOP ON  
HUNT  
DISABLE  
SPANISH  
PKT 26  
RECEIVED  
WSS  
RECEIVED  
WSS ON  
(Reserved)  
0
00H  
FLICKER  
STOP ON  
0 - Enable ‘Flicker Stopper’ circuitry  
1 - Disable ‘Flicker Stopper’ circuitry  
HUNT  
0 - Allow automatic hunting for amplitude of data to be acquired  
1 - Disable automatic hunting for amplitude  
DISABLE  
SPANISH  
0 - Enable special treatment of Spanish packet 26 characters  
1 - Disable special treatment of Spanish packet 26 characters  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
24  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
PKT 26  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
0 - No packet 26 data has been processed  
1 - Packet 26 data has been processed.  
RECEIVED  
Note: This flag is set by Hardware and must be reset by Software  
WSS  
RECEIVED  
0 - No Wide Screen Signalling data has been processed  
1 - Wide Screen signalling data has been processed  
Note: This flag is set by Hardware and must be reset by Software.  
WSS ON  
0 - Disable acquisition of WSS data.  
1 - Enable acquisition of WSS data.  
TXT9  
C9H  
CURSOR  
FREEZE  
CLEAR  
MEMORY  
A0  
R<4>  
R<3>  
R<2>  
R<1>  
R<0>  
00H  
CURSOR  
FREEZE  
0 - Use current TXT9 and TXT10 values for cursor position.  
1 - Lock cursor at current position  
CLEAR  
0 -  
MEMORY  
1 - Clear memory block pointed to by TXT15  
Note: This flag is set by Software and reset by Hardware  
A0  
0 - Access memory block pointed to by TXT15  
1 - Access extension packet memory  
R<4:0>  
Current memory ROW value.  
Note: Valid range TXT mode 0 to 24, CC mode 0 to 15  
TXT10  
CAH  
0
0
C<5>  
C<4>  
D<4>  
C<3>  
D<3>  
C<2>  
D<2>  
C<1>  
C<0>  
D<0>  
00H  
00H  
C<5:0>  
Current memory COLUMN value.  
Note: Valid range TXT mode 0 to 39, CC mode 0 to 47  
TXT11  
D<7:0>  
TXT12  
CBH  
D<7>  
D<6>  
D<5>  
D<1>  
1
Data value written or read from memory location defined by TXT9, TXT10 and TXT15  
CCH  
625/525  
SYNC  
ROM  
VER<4>  
ROM  
VER<3>  
ROM  
VER<2>  
ROM  
VER<1>  
ROM  
VER<0>  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
QUALITY  
xxxxx  
x1xB  
625/525  
SYNC  
0 - 625 line CVBS signal is being received  
1 - 525 line CVBS signal is being received  
ROM  
VER<4:0>  
Mask programmable identification for character set  
Rom Version <4> :  
0 - Spanish Flicker Stopper Disabled.  
1 - Spanish Flicker Stopper Enabled (Controlled by TXT8 Bit-6).  
1
Reserved  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
QUALITY  
0 - Acquisition can not be synchronised to CVBS input.  
1 - Acquisition can be synchronised to CVBS  
PAGE  
CLEARING  
TXT13  
F8H  
VPS  
RECEIVED  
525  
DISPLAY  
525 TEXT  
625 TEXT  
PKT 8/30  
FASTEXT  
0
xxxxx  
xx0B  
VPS  
0 -  
RECEIVED  
1 - VPS data  
PAGE  
0 - No page clearing active  
CLEARING  
1 - Software or Power On page clear in progress  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
25  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
525 DISPLAY  
0 - 625 Line synchronisation for Display.  
1 - 525 Line synchronisation for Display.  
525 TEXT  
625 TEXT  
PKT 8/30  
FASTEXT  
0 - 525 Line WST not being received  
1 - 525 line WST being received  
0 - 625 Line WST not being received  
1 - 625 line WST being received  
0 - No Packet 8/30/x(625) or Packet 4/30/x(525) data detected  
1 - Packet 8/30/x(625) or Packet 4/30/x(525) data detected  
0 - No Packet x/27 data detected  
1 - Packet x/27 data detected  
0
Reserved  
TXT14  
CDH  
0
0
0
DISPLAY  
BANK  
PAGE<3>  
PAGE<2>  
PAGE<1>  
PAGE<0>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
DISPLAY  
BANK  
0 - Select lower bank for Display  
1 - Select upper bank for Display  
PAGE<3:0>  
Current Display page  
TXT15  
CEH  
0
0
0
MICRO  
BANK  
BLOCK<3  
>
BLOCK<2  
>
BLOCK<1  
>
BLOCK<0  
>
MICRO  
BANK  
0 - Select lower bank for Micro  
1 - Select upper bank for Micro  
BLOCK<3:0>  
Current Micro block to be accessed by TXT9, TXT10 and TXT11  
TXT17  
B9H  
0
FORCE  
ACQ<1>  
FORCE  
ACQ<0>  
FORCE  
DISP<1>  
FORCE  
DISP<0>  
SCREEN  
COL2  
SCREEN  
COL1  
SCREEN  
COL0  
FORCE  
00 - Automatic Selection  
ACQ<1:0>  
01 - Force 525 timing, Force 525 Teletext Standard  
10 - Force 625 timing, Force 625 Teletext Standard  
11 - Force 625 timing, Force 525 Teletext Standard  
FORCE  
00 - Automatic Selection  
DISP<1:0>  
01 - Force Display to 525 mode (9 lines per row)  
10 - Force Display to 625 mode (10 lines per row)  
11 - Not Valid (default to 625)  
SCREEN  
Defines colour to be displayed instead of TV picture and black background. The bits <2:0> are equivalent to the RGB components  
COL<2:0>  
000 - Transparent  
001 - CLUT entry 9  
010 - CLUT entry 10  
011- CLUT entry 11  
100 - CLUT entry 12  
101 - CLUT entry 13  
110- CLUT entry 14  
111 - CLUT entry 15  
TXT18  
B2H  
NOT<3>  
NOT<2>  
NOT<1>  
NOT<0>  
0
0
BS<1>  
BS<0>  
00H  
NOT<3:0>  
BS<1:0>  
National Option table selection, maximum of 32 when used with East/West bit  
Basic Character set selection  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
26  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
TXT19  
ADD  
BIT7  
TEN  
BIT6  
TC<2>  
BIT5  
TC<1>  
BIT4  
TC<0>  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
TS<1>  
BIT0  
TS<0>  
RESET  
00H  
B3H  
0
0
TEN  
0 - Disable Twist function  
1- Enable Twist character set  
TC<2:0>  
TS<1:0>  
Language control bits (C12/C13/C14) that has Twisted character set  
Twist Character set selection  
TXT20  
B4H  
DRCS  
ENABLE  
OSD  
PLANES  
0
0
OSD  
LANG  
OSD  
LAN<2>  
OSD  
LAN<1>  
OSD  
LAN<0>  
00H  
ENABLE  
DRCS  
ENABLE  
0 - Normal OSD characters used  
1 - Re-map column 9 to DRCS (TXT and CC modes),  
OSD  
PLANES  
0 - Character code columns 8 and 9 defined as single plane characters  
1- Character code columns 8 and 9 defined as double plane characters  
OSD LANG  
ENABLE  
Enable use of OSD LAN<2:0> to define language option for display, instead of C12/C13/C14  
Alternative C12/C13/C14 bits for use with OSD menus  
OSD  
LAN<2:0>  
TXT21  
B5H  
DISP  
DISP  
CHAR  
CHAR  
Reserved  
CC ON  
I2C PORT0  
CC/TXT  
02H  
LINES<1>  
LINES<0>  
SIZE<1>  
SIZE<0>  
DISP  
LINES<1:0>  
The number of display lines per character row.  
00 - 10 lines per character (defaults to 9 lines in 525 mode)  
01 - 13 lines per character  
10 - 16 lines per character  
11 - reserved  
CHAR  
Character matrix size.  
SIZE<1:0>  
00 - 10 lines per character (matrix 12x10)  
01 - 13 lines per character (matrix 12x13)  
10 - 16lines per character (matrix 12x16)  
11 - reserved  
CCON  
I2C PORT0  
CC/TXT  
0 - Closed Caption acquisition off  
1 - Closed Caption acquisition on  
0 - Disable I2C PORT0  
1 - Enable I2C PORT0 selection (P1.7/SDA0, P1.6/SCL0)  
0 - Display configured for TXT mode  
1 - Display configured for CC mode  
TXT22  
B6H  
GPF<7>  
GPF<6>  
GPF<5>  
GPF<4>  
GPF<3>  
GPF<2>  
GPF<1>  
GPF<0>  
XXH  
GPF<7:6>  
GPF<5>  
General purpose register, bits defined by mask programmable bits  
0 - Standard Painter device  
1 - Enhanced Painter device  
GPF<4>  
(Used for  
software only)  
0 - Choose 6 page teletext device  
1 - Choose 10 page teletext device  
GPF<3>  
0 - PWM0, PWM1, PWM2 & PWM3 output on Port 3.0 to Port 3.3 respectively  
1 - PWM0, PWM1, PWM2 & PWM3 output on Port 2.1 to Port 2.4 respectively  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
27  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Names  
GPF<2>  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
0 - Disable Closed Caption acquisition  
1 - Enable Closed Caption acquisition  
GPF<1>  
0 - Disable Text acquisition  
1 - Enable Text acquisition  
GPF<0>  
(Polarity  
reversed in  
Painter1_Plus  
standalone)  
0 - Standalone (Painter1_Plus) mode  
1 - UOC mode  
WDT  
FFH  
Watch Dog Timer period  
FEH WKEY<7>  
WDV<7>  
WDV<6>  
WDV<5>  
WDV<4>  
WDV<3>  
WDV<2>  
WDV<1>  
WDV<0>  
00H  
00H  
WDv<7:0>  
WDTKEY  
WKEY<7:0>  
WKEY<6>  
WKEY<5>  
WKEY<4>  
WKEY<3>  
WKEY<2>  
WKEY<1>  
WKEY<0>  
Watch Dog Timer Key.  
Note: Must be set to 55H to disable Watch dog timer when active.  
WSS1  
BAH  
0
0
0
WSS<3:0>  
ERROR  
WSS<3>  
WSS<2>  
WSS<6>  
WSS<10>  
WSS<1>  
WSS<5>  
WSS<9>  
WSS<0>  
WSS<4>  
WSS<8>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
WSS<3:0>  
ERROR  
0 - No error in WSS<3:0>  
1 - Error in WSS<3:0>  
WSS<3:0>  
Signalling bits to define aspect ratio (group 1)  
BBH  
WSS2  
0
0
0
WSS<7:4>  
ERROR  
WSS<7>  
WSS<7:4>  
ERROR  
0 - No errors in WSS<7:4>  
1 - Error in WSS<7:4>  
WSS<7:4>  
Signalling bits to define enhanced services (group 2)  
WSS3  
BCH  
WSS<13:11  
< ERROR  
WSS<13>  
WSS<12>  
WSS<11>  
WSS<10:8>  
ERROR  
WSS<13:11>  
ERROR  
0 - No error in WSS<13:11>  
1 - Error in WSS<13:11>  
WSS<13:11>  
Signalling bits to define reserved elements (group 4)  
WSS<10:8>  
ERROR  
0 - No error in WSS<10:8>  
1 - Error in WS<10:8>  
WSS<10:8>  
XRAMP  
Signalling bits to define subtitles (group 3)  
FAH  
XRAMP<7>  
XRAMP<6>  
XRAMP<5>  
XRAMP<4>  
XRAMP<3>  
XRAMP<2>  
XRAMP<1>  
XRAMP<0>  
00H  
XRAMP<7:0>  
Internal RAM access upper byte address.  
Table 3 SFR Bit description  
2001 Jan 18  
28  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
External (Auxiliary + Display) Memory  
consecutive bytes. XRAMP only works on internal MOVX  
memory.  
The normal 80C51 external memory area has been  
mapped internally to the device, this means that the MOVX  
instruction accesses data memory internal to the device.  
The movx memory map is shown in Fig.7.  
FFH  
FFFFH  
(XRAMP)=FFH  
(XRAMP)=FEH  
00H  
FFH  
FF00H  
FEFFH  
7FFFH  
FFFFH  
00H  
FFH  
FE00H  
01FFH  
MOVX @Ri, A  
MOVX A, @Ri  
MOVX @DPTR,A  
MOVX A,@DPTR  
(XRAMP)=01H  
(XRAMP)=00H  
4800H  
47FFH  
00H  
FFH  
0100H  
00FFH  
8C00H  
8BFFH  
00H  
0000H  
Dynamically  
Re-definable  
Characters  
Fig.8 Indirect addressing  
(Movx address space)  
Display RAM  
for  
TEXT PAGES(2)  
8800H  
87FFH  
Display Registers  
Power-on Reset  
87F0H  
Power on reset is generated internally to the  
TDA935X/6x/8x device, hence no external reset circuitry is  
required. The TV processor die shall generate the master  
reset in the system, which in turn will reset the  
microcontroller die  
871FH  
8700H  
CLUT  
2000H  
07FFH  
845FH  
Display RAM  
for  
Data RAM(1)  
Closed Caption(3)  
8000H  
A external reset pin is still present and is logically ORed  
with the internal Power on reset. This pin will only be used  
for test modes and OTP/ISP programming. The active high  
reset pin incorporates an internal pull-down, thus it can be  
left unconnected in application.  
0000H  
Lower 32K bytes  
Upper 32K bytes  
(1) Amount of Data RAM depends on device, PainterOSD 64K has 0.75K,  
Painter1.1 has 1K and Painter1.10 has 2K  
(2) Amount of Display RAM depends on the device, PainterOSD 64K has  
1.25K, Painter1.1 has 2K and Painter1.10 has 10K  
Power Saving modes of Operation  
(3) Display RAM for Closed Caption and Text is shared  
There are three Power Saving modes, Idle, Stand-by and  
Power Down, incorporated into the Painter1_Plus die.  
When utilizing either mode, the 3.3v power to the device  
(Vddp, Vddc & Vdda) should be maintained, since Power  
Saving is achieved by clock gating on a section by section  
basis.  
Fig.7 Movx Address Map  
Auxiliary RAM Page Selection  
The Auxiliary RAM page pointer is used to select one of  
the 256 pages within the auxiliary RAM, not all pages are  
allocated, refer to Fig.8. A page consists of 256  
STAND-BY MODE  
During Stand-by mode, the Acquisition and Display  
sections of the device are disabled. The following  
functions remain active:-  
80c51 CPU Core  
Memory Interface  
I2C  
Timer/Counters  
WatchDog Timer  
SAD and PWMs  
2001 Jan 18  
29  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
To enter Stand-by mode, the STAND-BY bit in the  
ROMBANK register must be set. Once in Stand-By, the  
XTAL oscillator continues to run, but the internal clock to  
Acquisition and Display are gated out. However, the clocks  
to the 80c51 CPU Core, Memory Interface, I2C,  
Timer/Counters, WatchDog Timer and Pulse Width  
Modulators are maintained. Since the output values on  
RGB and VDS are maintained the display output must be  
disabled before entering this mode.  
This mode may be used in conjunction with both Idle and  
Power-Down modes. Hence, prior to entering either Idle or  
Power-Down, the STAND-BY bit may be set, thus allowing  
wake-up of the 80c51 CPU core without fully waking the  
entire device (This enables detection of a Remote Control  
source in a power saving mode).  
executed will be the one following the instruction that put  
the device into Idle.  
The third method of terminating Idle mode is with an  
external hardware reset. Since the oscillator is running,  
the hardware reset need only be active for two machine  
cycles (24 clocks at 12MHz) to complete the reset  
operation. Reset defines all SFRs and Display memory  
to a pre-defined state, but maintains all other RAM  
values. Code execution commences with the Program  
Counter set to ’0000’.  
POWER DOWN MODE  
In Power Down mode the XTAL oscillator still runs, and  
differential clock transmitter is active. The contents of all  
SFRs and Data memory are maintained, however, the  
contents of the Auxiliary/Display memory are lost. The port  
pins maintain the values defined by their associated SFRs.  
Since the output values on RGB and VDS are maintained  
the Display output must be made inactive before entering  
Power Down mode.  
The power down mode is activated by setting the PD bit in  
the PCON register. It is advised to disable the WatchDog  
timer prior to entering Power down. Recovery from  
Power-Down takes several milli-seconds as the oscillator  
must be given time to stabilise.  
There are three methods of exiting power down:-  
An External interrupt provides the first mechanism for  
waking from Power-Down. Since the clock is stopped,  
external interrupts needs to be set level sensitive prior to  
entering Power-Down. The interrupt is serviced, and  
following the instruction RETI, the next instruction to be  
executed will be the one after the instruction that put the  
device into Power-Down mode.  
IDLE MODE  
During Idle mode, Acquisition, Display and the CPU  
sections of the device are disabled. The following  
functions remain active:-  
Memory Interface  
I2C  
Timer/Counters  
WatchDog Timer  
SAD & PWMs  
To enter Idle mode the IDL bit in the PCON register must  
be set. The WatchDog timer must be disabled prior to  
entering Idle to prevent the device being reset. Once in Idle  
mode, the XTAL oscillator continues to run, but the internal  
clock to the CPU, Acquisition and Display are gated out.  
However, the clocks to the Memory Interface, I2C,  
Timer/Counters, WatchDog Timer and Pulse Width  
Modulators are maintained. The CPU state is frozen along  
with the status of all SFRs, internal RAM contents are  
maintained, as are the device output pin values. Since the  
output values on RGB and VDS are maintained the  
Display output must be disabled before entering this  
mode.  
There are three methods available to recover from Idle:-  
Assertion of an enabled interrupt will cause the IDL bit to  
be cleared by hardware, thus terminating Idle mode.  
The interrupt is serviced, and following the instruction  
RETI, the next instruction to be executed will be the one  
after the instruction that put the device into Idle mode.  
A second method of exiting Power-Down is via an  
Interrupt generated by the SAD DC Compare circuit.  
When Painter is configured in this mode, detection of a  
certain analogue threshold at the input to the SAD may  
be used to trigger wake-up of the device i.e. TV Front  
Panel Key-press. As above, the interrupt is serviced,  
and following the instruction RETI, the next instruction to  
be executed will be the one following the instruction that  
put the device into Power-Down.  
The third method of terminating the Power-Down mode  
is with an external hardware reset. Reset defines all  
SFRs and Display memory, but maintains all other RAM  
values. Code execution commences with the Program  
Counter set to ’0000’.  
A second method of exiting Idle is via an Interrupt  
generated by the SAD DC Compare circuit. When  
Painter is configured in this mode, detection of an  
analogue threshold at the input to the SAD may be used  
to trigger wake-up of the device i.e. TV Front Panel  
Key-press. As above, the interrupt is serviced, and  
following the instruction RETI, the next instruction to be  
2001 Jan 18  
30  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
I/O Facility  
In addition to the conventional 80c51, two application  
specific interrupts are incorporated internal to the device  
which have the following functionality:-  
I/O PORTS  
The IC has 13 I/O lines, each is individually addressable,  
or form part of 4 parallel addressable ports which are  
port0, port1, port2 and port3.  
CC (Closed Caption Data Ready Interrupt) - This  
interrupt is generated when the device is configured for  
Closed Caption acquisition. The interrupt is activated at  
the end of the currently selected Slice Line as defined in  
the CCLIN SFR.  
PORT TYPE  
All individual ports can be programmed to function in one  
of four modes, the mode is defined by two Port  
Configuration SFRs. The modes available are Open Drain,  
Quasi-bidirectional, High Impedance and Push-Pull.  
BUSY (Display Busy Interrupt) - An interrupt is  
generated when the Display enters either a Horizontal or  
Vertical Blanking Period. i.e. Indicates when the  
micro-controller can update the Display RAM without  
causing undesired effects on the screen. This interrupt can  
be configured in one of two modes using the MMR  
Configuration Register (Address 87FF, Bit-3 [TXT/V]):-  
TeXT Display Busy: An interrupt is generated on each  
active horizontal display line when the Horizontal  
Blanking Period is entered.  
Open Drain  
The Open drain mode can be used for bi-directional  
operation of a port. It requires an external pull-up resistor,  
the pull-up voltage has a maximum value of 5.5V, to allow  
connection of the device into a 5V environment.  
Vertical Display Busy: An interrupt is generated on each  
vertical display field when the Vertical Blanking Period is  
entered.  
Quasi bi-directional  
The quasi-bidirectional mode is a combination of open  
drain and push pull. It requires an external pull-up resistor  
to VDDp (nominally 3.3V). When a signal transition from  
0->1 is output from the device, the pad is put into push-pull  
mode for one clock cycle (166ns) after which the pad goes  
into open drain mode. This mode is used to speed up the  
edges of signal transitions. This is the default mode of  
operation of the pads after reset.  
INTERRUPT ENABLE STRUCTURE  
Each of the individual interrupts can be enabled or  
disabled by setting or clearing the relevant bit in the  
interrupt enable SFRs (IE and IEN1). All interrupt sources  
can also be globally disabled by clearing the EA bit (IE.7).  
High Impedance  
H1 Highest Priority Level1  
EX0  
L1  
The high impedance mode can be used for Input only  
operation of the port. When using this configuration the two  
output transistors are turned off.  
Highest Priority Level0  
H2  
ET0  
L2  
H3  
EX1  
ET1  
ECC  
L3  
H4  
Push-Pull  
L4  
H5  
The push pull mode can be used for output only. In this  
mode the signal is driven to either 0V or VDDp, which is  
nominally 3.3V.  
L5  
H6  
ES2  
L6  
H7  
EBUSY  
L7  
IE.0:6  
IE1.0  
IP.0:6  
IP1.0  
Interrupt System  
Lowest Priority Level1  
Lowest Priority Level0  
H8  
L8  
The device has 8 interrupt sources, each of which can be  
enabled or disabled. When enabled, each interrupt can be  
assigned one of two priority levels. There are four  
interrupts that are common to the 80C51, two of these are  
external interrupts (EX0 and EX1) and the other two are  
timer interrupts (ET0 and ET1). There is also one interrupt  
(ES2) connected to the 80c51 micro-controller IIC  
peripheral for Transmit and Receive operation.  
The TDA935X/6x/8x family of devices have an additional  
16-bit Timer (with 8-bit Pre-scaler). To accommodate this,  
another interrupt ET2PR has been added to indicate timer  
overflow.  
ET2PR  
IE.7  
Interrupt  
Source  
Source  
Enable  
Global  
Enable  
Priority  
Control  
Fig.9 Interrupt Structure  
INTERRUPT ENABLE PRIORITY  
Each interrupt source can be assigned one of two priority  
levels. The interrupt priorities are defined by the interrupt  
priority SFRs (IP and IP1). A low priority interrupt can be  
interrupted by a high priority interrupt, but not by another  
low priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt can not be  
interrupted by any other interrupt source. If two requests of  
2001 Jan 18  
31  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
different priority level are received simultaneously, the  
request with the highest priority level is serviced. If  
requests of the same priority level are received  
simultaneously, an internal polling sequence determines  
which request is serviced. Thus, within each priority level  
there is a second priority structure determined by the  
polling sequence as defined in Table 4.  
In Counter mode, the register is incremented in response  
to a negative transition at its corresponding external pin  
T0/1. Since the pins T0/1 are sampled once per machine  
cycle it takes two machine cycles to recognise a transition,  
this gives a maximum count rate of 1/24 Fosc = 0.5MHz.  
There are six special function registers used to control the  
timers/counters as defined in Table 6.  
Source  
EX0  
Priority within level  
Interrupt Vector  
0003H  
SFR  
TCON  
TMOD  
TL0  
Address  
88H  
Highest  
ET0  
000BH  
89H  
EX1  
0013H  
8AH  
8BH  
ET1  
001BH  
TH0  
ECC  
0023H  
TL1  
8CH  
ES2  
002BH  
TH1  
8DH  
EBUSY  
ET2PR  
0033H  
Table 6 Timer/Counter Registers  
Lowest  
003BH  
Table 4 Interrupt Priority (within same level)  
TF1 TR TF0 TR IE1 IT1 IE0 IT0  
Symbol  
TF1  
Position  
TCON.7  
Name and Significance  
INTERRUPT VECTOR ADDRESS  
Timer 1 overflow flag. Set by hard-  
ware on timer/counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor  
vectors to interrupt routine.  
Timer 1 Run control bit. Set/cleared  
by software to turn timer.counter  
on/off.  
Timer 0 overflow flag. Set by hard-  
ware on timer/counter overflow.  
Cleared by hardware when processor  
vectors to interrupt routine.  
Timer 0 Run control bit. Set/cleared  
by software to turn timer.counter  
on/off.  
The processor acknowledges an interrupt request by  
executing a hardware generated LCALL to the appropriate  
servicing routine. The interrupt vector addresses are  
shown in Table 4.  
TR1  
TF0  
TCON.6  
TCON.5  
LEVEL/EDGE INTERRUPT  
TR0  
TCON.4  
The external interrupt can be programmed to be either  
level-activated or transition activated by setting or clearing  
the IT0/1 bits in the Timer Control SFR(TCON).  
Symbol  
IE1  
Position  
TCON.3  
Name and Significance  
Interrupt 1 Edge flag. Set by hardware  
when external interrupt edge  
detected. Cleared when interrupt  
processed.  
ITx  
Level  
Edge  
IT1  
IE0  
IT0  
TCON.2  
TCON.1  
TCON.0  
Interrupt 1 Type control bit.  
Set/cleared by software to specify fall-  
ing edge/low level triggered external  
interrupts.  
Interrupt 0 Edge flag. Set by hardware  
when external interrupt edge  
detected. Cleared when interrupt  
processed.  
Interrupt 0 Type control bit.  
Set/cleared by software to specify fall-  
ing edge/low level triggered external  
interrupts.  
0
Active low  
1
INT0 = Negative Edge  
INT1 = Positive and Negative Edge  
Table 5 External Interrupt Activation  
The external interrupt INT1 differs from the standard  
80C51 in that it is activated on both edges when in edge  
sensitive mode. This is to allow software pulse width  
measurement for handling remote control inputs.  
Fig.10 Timer/Counter Control (TCON) register  
Timer/Counter  
Two 16 bit timers/counters are incorporated Timer0 and  
Timer1. Both can be configured to operate as either timers  
or event counters.  
In Timer mode, the register is incremented on every  
machine cycle. It is therefore counting machine cycles.  
Since the machine cycle consists of 12 oscillator periods,  
the count rate is 1/12 Fosc = 1MHz.  
2001 Jan 18  
32  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
interrupt. Upon overflow an interrupt should also be  
generated.  
Reset values of all registers should be 00 hex.  
In Timer mode, Timer 2 should count down from the value  
set on SFRs TP2PR, TP2H and TP2L. It is therefore  
counting machine cycles. Since the machine cycle  
consists of 12 oscillator periods, the count rate is 1/12 fosc  
(1MHz).  
Gat C/T M1 M0 Gat C/T M1 M0  
Timer 1 Timer 0  
Gate  
Gating control when set. Timer/counter is enabled only  
while px_int_n is high and TR control bit is set. When  
cleared timer/counter is enabled whenever TR control bit  
is set.  
C/T  
Timer or Counter selector. Cleared for timer operation  
(input from system clock). Set for counter operation (input  
from T input pin.  
Timer2 interval = (TP2H * 256 + TP2L) * (TP2PR + 1) * 1 us  
M1 M0  
Operating  
0
0
1
0
1
0
8048 Timer, TL serves as 5-bit prescaler.  
16-bit Timer/Counter, TL and TH are cascaded.  
8-bit auto-reload Timer/Counter, TH holds a value  
which is to be loaded into TL.  
timer 0: two 8-bit Timers/Counters. TL0 is controlled by  
timer 0 control bits. TH0 is controlled by timer 1 control  
bits. timer 1: stopped.  
WatchDog Timer  
The WatchDog timer is a counter that once in an overflow  
state forces the micro-controller in to a reset condition. The  
purpose of the WatchDog timer is to reset the  
micro-controller if it enters an erroneous processor state  
(possibly caused by electrical noise or RFI) within a  
reasonable period of time. When enabled, the WatchDog  
circuitry will generate a system reset if the user program  
fails to reload the WatchDog timer within a specified length  
of time known as the WatchDog interval.  
1
1
Fig.11 Timer/Counter Mode control (TMOD)  
The Timer/Counter function is selected by control bits C/T  
in the Timer Mode SFR (TMOD). These two  
Timer/Counter have four operating modes, which are  
selected by bit-pairs (M1.M0) in the TMOD. Refer to the  
80C51 based 8-bit micro-controllers - Philips  
Semiconductors (ref. IC20) for detail of the modes and  
operation.  
The WatchDog timer consists of an 8-bit counter with an  
16-bit pre-scaler. The pre-scaler is fed with a signal whose  
frequency is 1/12 fosc (1MHz).  
The 8 bit timer is incremented every ‘t’ seconds where:  
TL0/TL1 and TH0/TH1 are the actual timer/counter  
registers for timer0 / timer1. TL0/TL1 is the low byte and  
TH0/TH1 is the high byte.  
t=12x65536x1/fosc=12x65536x1/12x106 = 65.536ms  
WATCHDOG TIMER OPERATION  
The WatchDog operation is activated when the WLE bit in  
the Power Control SFR (PCON) is set. The WatchDog can  
be disabled by Software by loading the value 55H into the  
WatchDog Key SFR (WDTKEY). This must be performed  
before entering Idle/Power Down mode to prevent exiting  
the mode prematurely.  
Once activated the WatchDog timer SFR (WDT) must be  
reloaded before the timer overflows. The WLE bit must be  
set to enable loading of the WDT SFR, once loaded the  
WLE bit is reset by hardware, this is to prevent erroneous  
Software from loading the WDT SFR.  
TIMER WITH PRE-SCALER  
An additional 16-bit timer with 8-bit pre-scaler is provided  
to allow timer periods up to 16.777 seconds. This timer  
remains active during IDLE mode.  
TP2L sets the lower value of the period for timer 2 and  
TP2H is the upper timer value. TP2PR provides an 8-bit  
pre-scaler for timer 2. The value on TP2PR, TP2H and  
TP2L shall never change unless updated by the software.  
If the micro reads TP2R, TP2H orTP2L at any stage, this  
should return the value written and not the current timer 2  
value. The timer 2 should continue after overflow by  
re-loading the timer with the values of SFRs TP2PR, TP2H  
and TP2L.  
The value loaded into the WDT defines the WatchDog  
interval.  
TP2CL and TP2CH indicate the current timer 2 value.  
These should be readable both when the timer 2 is active  
and inactive. Once the timer 2 is disable, the timer 2 value  
at the time of disabling should be maintained on the SFRs  
TP2CL and TP2CH. At a count of zero (on TP2CL and  
TP2CH), the overflow flag should be set:- TP2CRL<1> - ’0’  
= no timer 2 overflow, ’1’= timer 2 overflow.  
TP2CRL is the control and status for timer 2. TP2CRL.0 is  
the timer enable and TP2CRL.1 is the timer overflow  
status. The overflow flag will need to be reset by software.  
Hence, if required, software may poll flag rather than use  
WatchDog interval = (256 - WDT) * t = (256 -WDT) * 65.536ms.  
The range of intervals is from WDT=00H which gives  
16.777s to WDT=FFH which gives 65.536ms.  
PORT Alternate Functions  
The Ports 1,2 and 3 are shared with alternate functions to  
enable control of external devices and circuitry. The  
alternate functions are enabled by setting the appropriate  
2001 Jan 18  
33  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
SFR and also writing a ‘1’ to the Port bit that the function  
occupies.  
instruction cycle after the SAD<7:0> value has been set.  
The result of the comparison is given on VHI one  
instruction cycle after the setting of ST.  
PWM PULSE WIDTH MODULATORS  
The device has four 6-bit Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)  
outputs for analogue control of e.g. volume, balance, bass  
and treble. The PWM outputs generate pulse patterns with  
a repetition rate of 21.33us, with the high time equal to the  
PWM SFR value multiplied by 0.33us. The analogue value  
is determined by the ratio of the high time to the repetition  
time, a D.C. voltage proportional to the PWM setting is  
obtained by means of an external integration network (low  
pass filter).  
VDDP  
ADC0  
ADC1  
ADC2  
MUX  
4-1  
VHI  
ADC3  
+
CH<1:0>  
-
PWM Control  
8-bit  
DAC  
SAD<7:0>  
The relevant PWM is enabled by setting the PWM enable  
bit PWxE in the PWMx Control register. The high time is  
defined by the value PWxV<5:0>  
Fig.12 SAD Block Diagram  
TPWM TUNING PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR  
The device has a single 14-bit PWM that can be used for  
Voltage Synthesis Tuning. The method of operation is  
similar to the normal PWM except the repetition period is  
42.66us.  
SAD Input Voltage  
The external analogue voltage that is used for comparison  
with the internally generated DAC voltage, does not have  
the same voltage range due to the 5 V tolerance of the pin.  
It is limited to VDDP-Vtn where Vtn is a maximum of 0.75 V.  
For further details refer to the SAA55XX and SAA56XX  
Software Analogue to Digital Converter Application Note:  
SPG/AN99022.  
TPWM Control  
Two SFRs are used to control the TPWM, they are TDACL  
and TDACH. The TPWM is enabled by setting the TPWE  
bit in the TDACH SFR. The most significant bits TD<13:7>  
alter the high period between 0 and 42.33us. The 7 least  
significant bits TD<6:0> extend certain pulses by a further  
0.33us. e.g. if TD<6:0> = 01H then 1 in 128 periods will be  
extended by 0.33us, if TD<6:0>=02H then 2 in 128 periods  
will be extended.  
SAD DC Comparator Mode  
The SAD module incorporates a DC Comparator mode  
which is selected using the ’DC_COMP’ control bit in the  
SADB SFR. This mode enables the micro-controller to  
detect a threshold crossing at the input to the selected  
analogue input pin (P3.0, P3.1, P3.2 or P3.3) of the  
Software A/D Converter. A level sensitive interrupt is  
generated when the analogue input voltage level at the pin  
falls below the analogue output level of the SAD D/A  
converter.  
The TPWM will not start to output a new value until TDACH  
has been written to. Therefore, if the value is to be  
changed, TACL should be written before TDACH.  
SAD SOFTWARE A/D  
Four successive approximation Analogue to Digital  
Converters can be implemented in software by making use  
of the on board 8-bit Digital to Analogue Converter and  
Analogue Comparator.  
This mode is intended to provide the device with a  
wake-up mechanism from Power-Down or Idle when a  
key-press on the front panel of the TV is detected.  
The following software sequence should be used when  
utilizing this mode for Power-Down or Idle:-  
1. Disable INT1 using the IE SFR.  
SAD Control  
The control of the required analogue input is done using  
the channel select bits CH<1:0> in the SAD SFR, this  
selects the required analogue input to be passed to one of  
the inputs of the comparator. The second comparator input  
is generated by the DAC whose value is set by the bits  
SAD<7:0> in the SAD and SADB SFRs. A comparison  
between the two inputs is made when the start compare bit  
ST in the SAD SFR is set, this must be at least one  
2. Set INT1 to level sensitive using the TCON SFR.  
3. Set the D/A Converter digital input level to the desired  
threshold level using the SAD/SADB SFRs and select  
the required input pin (P3.0, P3.1, P3.2 or P3,3) using  
CH1, CH0 in the SAD SFR.  
4. Enter DC Compare mode by setting the ’DC_COMP’  
enable bit in the SADB SFR.  
2001 Jan 18  
34  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
5. Enable INT1 using the IE SFR.  
‘558 fast mode’ (iic_lut=”01”)  
This option accommodates the 558 I2C doubled rates as  
shown below: -  
6. Enter Power-Down/Idle. Upon wake-up the SAD  
should be restored to its conventional operating mode  
by disabling the ’DC_COMP’ control bit.  
f
clk (6MHz)  
I2C Serial I/O Bus  
I2C Bit Frequency  
(KHz) at fclk  
The I2C bus consists of a serial data line (SDA) and a serial  
clock line (SCL). The definition of the I2C protocol can be  
found in the 80C51 based 8-bit micro-controllers - Philips  
Semiconductors (ref. IC20).  
CR2  
CR1  
CR0  
divided by  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
30  
800  
20  
200  
7.5  
300  
400  
50  
The device operates in four modes: -  
Master Transmitter  
15  
120  
1600  
80  
Master Receiver  
Slave Transmitter  
Slave Receiver  
3.75  
75  
60  
100  
Table 8 IIC Serial Rates ‘558 fast mode’  
The micro-controller peripheral is controlled by the Serial  
Control SFR (S1CON) and its Status is indicated by the  
status SFR (S1STA). Information is transmitted/received  
to/from the I2C bus using the Data SFR (S1DAT) and the  
Slave Address SFR (S1ADR) is used to configure the  
slave address of the peripheral.  
‘558 slow mode’ (iic_lut=”10”)  
This option accommodates the 558 I2C rates divided by 2  
as shown below: -  
The byte level I2C serial port is identical to the I2C serial  
port on the 8xC558, except for the clock rate selection bits  
CR<2:0>. The operation of the subsystem is described in  
detail in the 8xC558 data sheet and can be found in the  
80C51 based 8-bit micro-controllers - Philips  
Semiconductors (ref. IC20).  
Three different IIC selection tables for CR<2:0> can be  
configured using the ROMBANK SFR (IIC_LUT<1:0>) as  
follows: -  
fclk (6MHz)  
I2C Bit Frequency  
CR2  
CR1  
CR0  
divided by  
120  
(KHz) at fclk  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
50  
3200  
80  
1.875  
75  
60  
100  
480  
12.5  
6400  
320  
0.9375  
18.75  
25  
‘558 nominal mode’ (iic_lut=”00”)  
This option accommodates the 558 I2C. The various serial  
rates are shown below: -  
240  
Table 9 IIC Serial Rates ‘558 slow mode’  
Note: In the above tables the fclk relates to the clock rate of  
the 80c51 IIC module (6MHz).  
fclk (6MHz)  
I2C Bit Frequency  
CR2  
CR1  
CR0  
divided by  
60  
(KHz) at fclk  
I2C Port Enable  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
100  
One external I2C port is available. This port is enabled  
using TXT21.I2C PORT0. Any information transmitted to  
the device can only be acted upon if the port is enabled.  
Internal communication between the 80c51  
1600  
40  
3.75  
150  
30  
200  
240  
25  
micro-controller and the TV Signal Processor will continue  
regardless of the value written to TXT21.I2C PORT0.  
3200  
160  
1.875  
37.5  
LED Support  
120  
50  
Port pins P0.5 and P0.6 have a 8mA current sinking  
capability to enable LEDs in series with current limiting  
resistors to be driven directly, without the need for  
additional buffering circuitry.  
Table 7 IIC Serial Rates ‘558 nominal mode’  
2001 Jan 18  
35  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
MEMORY INTERFACE  
Data Capture Features  
Video Signal Quality detector.  
The memory interface controls the access to the  
embedded DRAM, refreshing of the DRAM and page  
clearing. The DRAM is shared between Data Capture,  
Display and Microcontroller sections. The Data Capture  
section uses the DRAM to store acquired information that  
has been requested. The Display reads the DRAM  
information and converts it to RGB output values. The  
Microcontroller uses the DRAM as embedded auxiliary  
RAM.  
Data Capture for 625 line WST  
Data Capture for 525 line WST  
Data Capture for US Closed Caption  
Data Capture for VPS data (PDC system A)  
Data Capture for Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) bit  
decoding  
Automatic selection between 525 WST/625WST  
Automatic selection between 625WST/VPS on line 16 of  
VBI  
DATA CAPTURE  
The Data Capture section takes in the analogue  
Composite Video and Blanking Signal (CVBS) from One  
Chip, and from this extracts the required data, which is  
then decoded and stored in SFR memory.  
Real-time capture and decoding for WST Teletext in  
Hardware, to enable optimised microprocessor  
throughput  
The extraction of the data is performed in the digital  
domain. The first stage is to convert the analogue CVBS  
signal into a digital form. This is done using an ADC  
sampling at 12MHz. The data and clock recovery is then  
performed by a Multi-Rate Video Input Processor  
(MulVIP). From the recovered data and clock the following  
data types are extracted WST Teletext (625/525),Closed  
Caption, VPS, WSS. The extracted data is stored in either  
memory (DRAM) via the Memory Interface or in SFR  
locations.  
Up to 10 pages stored On-Chip  
Inventory of transmitted Teletext pages stored in the  
Transmitted Page Table (TPT) and Subtitle Page Table  
(SPT)  
Automatic detection of FASTEXT transmission  
Real-time packet 26 engine in Hardware for processing  
accented, G2 and G3 characters  
Signal quality detector for WST/VPS data types  
Comprehensive Teletext language coverage  
Full Field and Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) data  
capture of WST data  
Analogue to Digital Converter  
The CVBS input is passed through a differential to single  
ended converter (DIVIS), although in this device it is used  
in single ended configuration with a reference.The  
analogue output of DIVIS is converted into a digital  
representation by a full flash ADC with a sampling rate of  
12MHz.  
Multi Rate Video Input Processor  
The multi rate video input processor is a Digital Signal  
Processor designed to extract the data and recover the  
clock from the digital CVBS signal.  
2001 Jan 18  
36  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Data Standards  
The data and clock standards that can be recovered are  
shown in Table 10 below:-  
than 09h, then data being written to TXT3 is ignored. Table  
11 shows the contents of the page request RAM.  
Up to 10 pages of teletext can be acquired on the 10 page  
device, when TXT1.EXT PKT OFF is set to logic 1, and up  
to 9 pages can be acquired when this bit is set to logic 0.  
f the 'Do Care' bit for part of the page number is set to 0  
then that part of the page number is ignored when the  
teletext decoder is deciding whether a page being  
received off air should be stored or not. For example, if the  
Do Care bits for the 4 subcode digits are all set to 0 then  
every subcode version of the page will be captured.  
Data Standard  
Clock Rate  
6.9375 MHz  
5.7272 MHz  
5.0 MHz  
625WST  
525WST  
VPS  
WSS  
5.0 MHz  
Start  
Column  
Byte  
Identification  
PRD<4>  
PRD<3> PRD<2> PRD<1> PRD<0>  
Closed Caption  
500 KHz  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Magazine  
Page Tens  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
DO CARE  
x
HOLD  
PT3  
PU3  
x
MAG2  
PT2  
PU2  
x
MAG1  
PT1  
MAG0  
PT0  
Table 10 Data Slicing Standards  
Page Units  
PU1  
HT1  
HU1  
MT1  
MU1  
E1  
PU0  
HT0  
HU0  
MT0  
MU0  
E0  
Hours Tens  
Hours Units  
Minutes Tens  
Minutes Units  
Error Mode  
Data Capture Timing  
HU3  
x
HU2  
MT2  
MU2  
x
The Data Capture timing section uses the Synchronisation  
information extracted from the CVBS signal to generate  
the required Horizontal and Vertical reference timings.  
The timing section automatically recognises and selects  
the appropriate timings for either 625 (50Hz)  
synchronisation or 525 (60Hz) synchronisation. A flag  
TXT12.Video Signal Quality is set when the timing section  
is locked correctly to the incoming CVBS signal. When  
TXT12.Video Signal Quality is set another flag  
TXT12.625/525 SYNC can be used to identify the  
standard.  
MU3  
x
Table 11 The contents of the Page request RAM  
Note: MAG = Magazine PT = Page Tens PU = Page Units  
HT = Hours Tens HU = Hours Units  
MT = Minutes Tens MU = Minutes Units E = Error check  
mode  
When the Hold bit is set to 0 the teletext decoder will not  
recognise any page as having the correct page number  
and no pages will be captured. In addition to providing the  
user requested hold function this bit should be used to  
prevent the inadvertent capture of an unwanted page  
when a new page request is being made. For example, if  
the previous page request was for page 100 and this was  
being changed to page 234, it would be possible to capture  
page 200 if this arrived after only the requested magazine  
number had been changed.  
The E1 and E0 bits control the error checking which should  
be carried out on packets 1 to 23 when the page being  
requested is captured. This is described in more detail in a  
later section (‘Error Checking’).  
For a multi page device, each packet can only be written  
into one place in the teletext RAM so if a page matches  
more than one of the page requests the data is written into  
the area of memory corresponding to the lowest numbered  
matching page request.  
Acquisition  
The acquisition sections extracts the relevant information  
from the serial stream of data from the MulVIP and stores  
it in memory.  
625 WST ACQUISITION  
The family is capable of acquiring 625-line and 525-line  
World System Teletext. Teletext pages are identified by  
seven numbers: magazine (page hundreds), page tens,  
page units, hours tens, hours units, minutes tens and  
minutes units. The last four digits, hours and minutes, are  
known as the subcode, and were originally intended to be  
time related, hence their names.  
Making a page request  
A page is requested by writing a series of bytes into the  
TXT3.PRD<4:0> SFR which correspond to the number of  
the page required. The bytes written into TXT3 are stored  
in a RAM with an auto-incrementing address. The start  
address for the RAM is set using the TXT2.SC<2:0> to  
define which part of the page request is being written, and  
TXT2.REQ<3:0> is used to define which of the 10 page  
requests is being modified. If TXT2.REQ<3:0> is greater  
At power-up each page request defaults to any page, hold  
on and error check mode 0.  
Rolling Headers and Time  
When a new page has been requested it is conventional  
for the decoder to turn the header row of the display green  
2001 Jan 18  
37  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
and to display each page header as it arrives until the  
correct page has been found.  
each of blocks 0 to 8 contains a teletext page arranged in  
the same way as the basic page memory of the page  
device and block 9 contains extension packets. When the  
TXT1.EXT PKT OFF bit is logic 1, no extension packets  
are captured and block 9 of the memory is used to store  
another page. The number of the memory block into which  
a page is written corresponds to the page request number  
which resulted in the capture of the page.  
Packet 0, the page header, is split into 2 parts when it is  
written into the text memory. The first 8 bytes of the header  
contain control and addressing information. They are  
Hamming decoded and written into columns 0 to 7 of row  
25. Row 25 also contains the magazine number of the  
acquired page and the PBLF flag but the last 14 bytes are  
unused and may be used by the software, if necessary.  
When a page request is changed (i.e.: when the TXT3  
SFR is written to) a flag (PBLF) is written into bit 5, column  
9, row 25 of the corresponding block of the page memory.  
The state of the flag for each block is updated every TV  
line, if it is set for the current display block, the acquisition  
section writes all valid page headers which arrive into the  
display block and automatically writes an alpha-numerics  
green character into column 7 of row 0 of the display block  
every TV line.  
When a requested page header is acquired for the first  
time, rows 1 to 23 of the relevant memory block are  
cleared to space, i.e.: have 20h written into every column,  
before the rest of the page arrives. Row 24 is also cleared  
if the TXT0.X24 POSN bit is set. If the TXT1.EXT PKT OFF  
bit is set the extension packets corresponding to the page  
are also cleared.  
The last 8 characters of the page header are used to  
provide a time display and are always extracted from every  
valid page header as it arrives and written into the display  
block  
The TXT0. DISABLE HEADER ROLL bit prevents any  
data being written into row 0 of the page memory except  
when a page is acquired off air i.e.: rolling headers and  
time are not written into the memory. The TXT1.ACQ OFF  
bit prevents any data being written into the memory by the  
teletext acquisition section.  
Row 25 Data Contents  
The Hamming error flags are set if the on-board 8/4  
Hamming checker detects that there has been an  
incorrectable (2 bit) error in the associated byte. It is  
possible for the page to still be acquired if some of the  
page address information contains incorrectable errors if  
that part of the page request was a 'don't care'. There is no  
error flag for the magazine number as an incorrectable  
error in this information prevents the page being acquired.  
The interrupted sequence (C9) bit is automatically dealt  
with by the acquisition section so that rolling headers do  
not contain a discontinuity in the page number sequence.  
The magazine serial (C11) bit indicates whether the  
transmission is a serial or a parallel magazine  
transmission. This affects the way the acquisition section  
operates and is dealt with automatically.  
When a parallel magazine mode transmission is being  
received only headers in the magazine of the page  
requested are considered valid for the purposes of rolling  
headers and time. Only one magazine is used even if don't  
care magazine is requested. When a serial magazine  
mode transmission is being received all page headers are  
considered to be valid.  
The newsflash (C5), subtitle (C6), suppress header (C7),  
inhibit display (C10) and language control (C12 to 14) bits  
are dealt with automatically by the display section,  
described below.  
Error Checking  
The update (C8) bit has no effect on the hardware. The  
remaining 32 bytes of the page header are parity checked  
and written into columns 8 to 39 of row 0. Bytes which pass  
the parity check have the MSB set to 0 and are written into  
the page memory. Bytes with parity errors are not written  
into the memory.  
Before teletext packets are written into the page memory  
they are error checked. The error checking carried out  
depends on the packet number, the byte number, the error  
check mode bits in the page request data and the TXT1.8  
BIT bit.  
If an incorrectable error occurs in one of the Hamming  
checked addressing and control bytes in the page header  
or in the Hamming checked bytes in packet 8/30, bit 4 of  
the byte written into the memory is set, to act as an error  
flag to the software. If incorrectable errors are detected in  
any other Hamming checked data the byte is not written  
into the memory.  
Inventory Page  
If the TXT0.INV on bit is 1, memory block 8 is used as an  
inventory page. The inventory page consists of two tables,  
- the Transmitted Page Table (TPT) and the subtitle page  
table (SPT).  
In each table, every possible combination of the page tens  
and units digit, 00 to FFh, is represented by a byte. Each  
bit of these bytes corresponds to a magazine number so  
each page number, from 100 to 8FF, is represented by a  
bit in the table.The bit for a particular page in the TPT is set  
Teletext Memory Organisation  
The teletext memory is divided into 2 banks of 10 blocks.  
Normally, when the TXT1.EXT PKT OFF bit is logic 0,  
2001 Jan 18  
38  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
when a page header is received for that page. The bit in  
the SPT is set when a page header for the page is received  
which has the ‘subtitle’ page header control bit (C6)  
set.The bit for a particular page in the TPT is set when a  
page header is received for that page. The bit in the SPT  
is set when a page header for the page is received which  
has the ‘subtitle’ page header control bit (C6) set.  
setting of the TXT1. 8 BIT bit and the error checking control  
bits in the page request data and is the same as that  
applied to the data written into the same memory location  
in the 625 line format.  
The rolling time display (the last 8 characters in row 0) is  
taken from any packets X/1/1, 2 or 3 received. In parallel  
magazine mode only packets in the correct magazine are  
used for rolling time. Packet number X/1/0 is ignored.  
The tabulation bit is also used with extension packets. The  
first 8 data bytes of packet X/1/24 are used to extend the  
Fastext prompt row to 40 characters. These characters are  
written into whichever part of the memory the packet 24 is  
being written into (determined by the ‘X24 Posn’ bit).  
Packets X/0/27/0 contain 5 Fastext page links and the link  
control byte and are captured, Hamming checked and  
stored by in the same way as are packets X/27/0 in 625  
line text. Packets X/1/27/0 are not captured.  
Packet 26 Processing  
One of the uses of packet 26 is to transmit characters  
which are not in the basic teletext character set. The family  
automatically decodes packet 26 data and, if a character  
corresponding to that being transmitted is available in the  
character set, automatically writes the appropriate  
character code into the correct location in the teletext  
memory. This is not a full implementation of the packet 26  
specification allowed for in level 2 teletext, and so is often  
referred to as level 1.5.  
Because there are only 2 magazine bits in 525 line text,  
packets with the magazine bits all set to 0 are referred to  
as being in magazine 4. Therefore, the broadcast service  
data packet is packet 4/30, rather than packet 8/30. As in  
625 line text, the first 20 bytes of packet 4/30 contain  
encoded data which is decoded in the same way as that in  
packet 8/30. The last 12 bytes of the packet contains half  
of the parity encoded status message. Packet 4/0/30  
contains the first half of the message and packet 4/1/30  
contains the second half. The last 4 bytes of the message  
are not written into memory. The first 20 bytes of the each  
version of the packet are the same so they are stored  
whenever either version of the packet is acquired.  
In 525 line text each packet 26 only contains ten 24/18  
Hamming encoded data triplets, rather than the 13 found  
in 625 line text. The tabulation bit is used as an extra bit  
(the MSB) of the designation code, allowing 32 packet 26s  
to be transmitted for each page. The last byte of each  
packet 26 is ignored.  
By convention, the packets 26 for a page are transmitted  
before the normal packets. To prevent the default  
character data over writing the packet 26 data the device  
incorporates a mechanism which prevents packet 26 data  
from being overwritten. This mechanism is disabled when  
the Spanish national option is detected as the Spanish  
transmission system sends even parity (i.e. incorrect)  
characters in the basic page locations corresponding to  
the characters sent via packet 26 and these will not over  
write the packet 26 characters anyway. The special  
treatment of Spanish national option is prevented if  
TXT12. ROM VER R4 is logic 0 or if the TXT8.DISABLE  
SPANISH is set.  
Packet 26 data is processed regardless of the TXT1. EXT  
PKT OFF bit, but setting theTXT1.X26 OFF disables  
packet 26 processing.  
The TXT8. Packet 26 received bit is set by the hardware  
whenever a character is written into the page memory by  
the packet 26 decoding hardware. The flag can be reset by  
writing a 0 into the SFR bit.  
FASTEXT DETECTION  
When a packet 27, designation code 0 is detected,  
whether or not it is acquired, the TXT13. FASTEXT bit is  
set. If the device is receiving 525 line teletext, a packet  
X/0/27/0 is required to set the flag. The flag can be reset  
by writing a 0 into the SFR bit.  
525 WST  
The 525 line format is similar to the 625 line format but the  
data rate is lower and there are less data bytes per packet  
(32 rather than 40). There are still 40 characters per  
display row so extra packets are sent each of which  
contains the last 8 characters for four rows. These packets  
can be identified by looking at the ‘tabulation bit’ (T), which  
replaces one of the magazine bits in 525 line teletext.  
When an ordinary packet with T = 1 is received, the  
decoder puts the data into the four rows starting with that  
corresponding to the packet number, but with the 2 LSBs  
set to 0. For example, a packet 9 with T = 1 (packet X/1/9)  
contains data for rows 8, 9, 10 and 11. The error checking  
carried out on data from packets with T = 1 depends on the  
BROADCAST SERVICE DATA DETECTION  
When a packet 8/30 is detected, or a packet 4/30 when the  
device is receiving a 525 line transmission, the TXT13.  
Packet 8/30. The flag can be reset by writing a 0 into the  
SFR bit.  
VPS ACQUISITION  
When the TXT0. VPS ON bit is set, any VPS data present  
on line 16, field 0 of the CVBS signal at the input of the  
2001 Jan 18  
39  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
teletext decoder is error checked and stored in row 25,  
block 9 of the basic page memory. The device  
automatically detects whether teletext or VPS is being  
transmitted on this line and decodes the data  
appropriately.  
DISPLAY  
The display section is based on the requirements for a  
Level 1.5 WST Teletext and US Closed Caption. There are  
some enhancements for use with locally generated  
On-Screen Displays.  
The display section reads the contents of the Display  
memory and interprets the control/character codes. Using  
this information and other global settings, the display  
produces the required RGB signals and Video/Data (Fast  
Blanking) signal for the TV signal processing.  
The display is synchronised to the TV signal processing by  
way of Horizontal and Vertical sync signals generated  
within TDA935X/6x/8x. From these signals all display  
timings are derived.  
column  
0
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
Teletext page  
header data  
VPS  
VPS  
VPS  
VPS  
VPS  
VPS  
byte 4  
VPS  
byte 5  
row 25  
byte 14 byte 15  
byte 11 byte 12 byte 13  
Fig.13 VPS Data Storage  
Each VPS byte in the memory consists of 4 bi-phase  
decoded data bits (bits 0-3), a bi-phase error flag (bit 4)  
and three 0s (bits5-7). The TXT13. VPS Received bit is set  
by the hardware whenever VPS data is acquired. The flag  
can be reset by writing a 0 into the SFR bit.  
Display Features  
Teletext and Enhanced OSD modes  
Level 1.5 WST features  
US Closed Caption Features  
Serial and Parallel Display Attributes  
WSS ACQUISITION  
The Wide Screen Signalling data transmitted on line 23  
gives information on the aspect ratio and display position  
of the transmitted picture, the position of subtitles and on  
the camera/film mode. Some additional bits are reserved  
for future use. A total of 14 data bits are transmitted. All of  
the available data bits transmitted by the Wide Screen  
Signalling signal are captured and stored in SFRs WSS1,  
WSS2 and WSS3. The bits are stored as groups of related  
bits and an error flag is provided for each group to indicate  
when a transmission error has been detected in one or  
more of the bits in the group. Wide screen signalling data  
is only acquired when the TXT8.WSS ON bit is set. The  
TXT8.WSS RECEIVED bit is set by the hardware  
whenever wide screen signalling data is acquired. The flag  
can be reset by writing a 0 into the SFR bit.  
Single/Double/Quadruple Width and Height for  
characters  
Scrolling of display region.  
Variable flash rate controlled by software.  
Globally selectable scan lines per row 9/10/13/16.  
Globally selectable character matrix (HxV) 12x9, 12x10,  
12x13, 12x16.  
Italics, Underline and Overline.  
Soft Colours using CLUT with 4096 colour palette.  
Fringing (Shadow) selectable from N-S-E-W direction.  
Fringe colour selectable.  
Meshing of defined area.  
Contrast reduction of defined area.  
Cursor.  
CLOSED CAPTION ACQUISITION  
The US Closed Caption data is transmitted on line 21 (525  
line timings) and is used for Captioning information, Text  
information and Extended Data Services. Closed Caption  
data is only acquired when TXT21.CC ON bit is set.  
Two bytes of data are stored per field in SFRs, the first bye  
is stored in CCDAT1 and the second byte is stored in  
CCDAT2. The value in the CCDAT registers are reset to  
00h at the start of the Closed Caption line defined by  
CCLIN.CS<4:0>. At the end of the Closed Caption line an  
interrupt is generated if IE.ECC is active.  
Special Graphics characters with two planes, allowing  
four colours per character.  
32 Software re-definable On-Screen Display characters.  
4 WST Character sets(G0/G2) in single device (e.g.  
Latin,Cyrillic,Greek,Arabic).  
G1 Mosaic graphics, Limited G3 Line drawing  
characters.  
WST Character sets and Closed Caption Character set  
in single device.  
The processing of the Closed Caption data to convert into  
a displayable format is performed by Software.  
Display Modes  
The display section has two distinct modes with different  
features available in each. The two modes are:  
2001 Jan 18  
40  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TXT:This is the display configured as the WST mode  
with additional serial and global attributes to enable  
the same functionality as the SAA5497 (ETT)  
device.The display is configured as a fixed 25 rows  
with 40 characters per row.  
Display Features available in each mode  
The following is a list of features available in each mode.  
Each setting can either be a serial or parallel attribute, and  
some have a global effect on the display.  
CC:This is the display configured as the US Closed  
Caption mode with the same functionality as the  
PC83C771 device. The display is configured as a  
maximum of 16 rows with a maximum of 48  
characters per row.  
Feature  
Flash  
TXT  
CC  
serial  
serial  
Boxes  
Txt/OSD (Serial)  
x1/x2/x4 (serial)  
serial  
Horizontal Size  
Vertical Size  
x1/x2 (serial)  
x1/x2 (serial)  
In both of the above modes the Character matrix, and TV  
lines per row can be defined. There is an option of 9, 10,  
13 & 16 TV lines per display row, and a Character matrix  
(HxV) of 12x9, 12x10, 12x13, or 12x16. Not all  
combinations of TV lines per row and maximum display  
rows give a sensible OSD display, since there is limited  
number of TV scan lines available.  
x1/x2 (serial)  
x4 (global)  
Italic  
N/A  
serial  
Foreground  
colours  
8 (serial)  
8+8 (parallel)  
Special Function Register, TXT21 is used to control the  
character matrix and lines per row.  
Background  
colours  
8 (serial)  
16 (serial)  
Soft Colours  
(CLUT)  
16 from 4096  
16 from 4096  
Underline  
Overline  
N/A  
serial  
serial  
N/A  
Fringe  
N+S+E+W  
16 (Global)  
N+S+E+W  
16 (Serial)  
All (Global)  
Fringe Colour  
Meshing of  
Background  
Black or Colour  
(Global)  
Fast Blanking  
Polarity  
YES  
YES  
Screen Colour  
DRCS  
16 (Global)  
32 (Global)  
16 (Global)  
32 (Global)  
Character Matrix  
(HxV)  
12x9/10/13/16  
12x9/10/13/16  
No. of Rows  
25  
40  
16  
48  
No. of Columns  
No of Characters  
displayable  
1000  
768  
Cursor  
YES  
16  
YES  
16  
Special Graphics  
(2 planes per  
character)  
Scroll  
NO  
YES  
Table 12 Display Features  
2001 Jan 18  
41  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Display Feature Descriptions  
the ‘double width’ or double size (0Eh/BEh/0Fh/BFh)  
enables double width characters. Any two consecutive  
combination of ‘double width’ or ‘double size’  
FLASH  
Flashing causes the foreground colour pixel to be  
displayed as the background pixels.The flash frequency is  
controlled by software setting and resetting display  
register REG0: Status at the appropriate interval.  
CC: This attribute is valid from the time set (see Table 18)  
until the end of the row or until otherwise modified.  
TXT: This attribute is set by the control character ‘flash’  
(08h) and remains valid until the end of the row or until  
reset by the control character ‘steady’ (09h).  
(0Eh/BEh/0Fh/Bfh) activates quadruple width characters,  
provided quadruple width characters are enabled by  
TXT4.Quad Width Enable. Three vertical sizes are  
available normal(x1),double(x2),quadruple(x4). The  
control characters ‘normal size’ (0Ch/BCh) enable normal  
size, the ‘double height’ or ‘double size’  
(0Dh/BDh/0Fh/BFh) enable double height characters.  
Quadruple height character are achieved by using double  
height characters and setting the global attributes  
TXT7.Double Height (expand) and TXT7.Bottom/Top.  
If double height characters are used in teletext mode,  
single height characters in the lower row of the double  
height character are automatically disabled.  
BOXES  
CC: This attribute is valid from the time set until end of row  
or otherwise modified if set with Serial Mode 0. If set with  
Serial Mode 1, then it is set from the next character  
onwards.  
ITALIC  
In CC text mode the background colour is displayed  
regardless of the setting of the box attribute bit. Boxes take  
affect only during mixed mode, where boxes are set in this  
mode the background colour is displayed. Character  
locations where boxes are not set show video/screen  
colour (depending on the setting in the display control  
register. REG0: Display Control) in stead of the  
background colour.  
CC: This attribute is valid from the time set until the end of  
the row or otherwise modified. The attribute causes the  
character foreground pixels to be offset horizontally by 1  
pixel per 4 scan lines (interlaced mode). The base is the  
bottom left character matrix pixel. The pattern of the  
character is indented as shown in Fig.14.  
TXT: Two types of boxes exist the Teletext box and the  
OSD box. The Teletext box is activated by the ‘start box’  
control character (0Bh), Two start box characters are  
required begin a Teletext box, with box starting between  
the 2 characters. The box ends at the end of the line or  
after a ‘end box’ control character.  
TXT mode can also use OSD boxes, they are started using  
size implying OSD control chracters(BCh/BDh/BEh/BFh).  
The box starts after the control character (‘set after’) and  
ends either at the end of the row or at the next size  
implying OSD character (‘set at’). The attributes flash,  
teletext box, conceal, separate graphics, twist and hold  
graphics are all reset at the start of an OSD box, as they  
are at the start of the row. OSD Boxes are only valid in TV  
mode which is defined by TXT5=03h and TXT6=03h.  
SIZE  
The size of the characters can be modified in both the  
horizontal and vertical directions.  
CC: Two sizes are available in both the horizontal and  
vertical directions. The sizes available are normal (x1),  
double (x2) height/width and any combination of these.  
The attribute setting is always valid for the whole row.  
Mixing of sizes within a row is not possible.  
TXT: Three horizontal sizes are available  
normal(x1),double(x2),quadruple(x4). The control  
characters ‘normal size’ (0Ch/BCh) enables normal size,  
2001 Jan 18  
42  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TXT: The Italic attribute is not available.  
12x13 character matrix  
12x16 character matrix  
12x10 character matrix  
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10  
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10  
0
1
Indented by 7/6/4  
Indented by 6/5/3  
Indented by 5/4/2  
Indented by 4/3/1  
Indented by 3/2/0  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Indented by 2/1  
Indented by 1/0  
Indented by 0  
Field 1  
Field 2  
Fig.14 Italic Characters (12x10, 12x13 & 12x16).  
TXT: The foreground colour is selected via a control  
character. The colour control characters takes effect at the  
start of the next character (“Set-After”) and remain valid  
until the end of the row, or until modified by a control  
character. Only 8 foreground colours are available.  
The TEXT foreground control characters map to the CLUT  
entries as shown below:  
COLOURS  
CLUT (Colour Look Up Table)  
A CLUT (Colour Look Up Table) with 16 colour entries is  
provided. The colours are programmable out of a palette  
of 4096(4 bits per R, G and B). The CLUT is defined by  
writing data to a RAM that resides in the MOVX address  
space of the 80C51.  
Control Code  
Defined Colour  
Black  
CLUT Entry  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RED3-0  
b11. . .b4  
GRN3-0  
b7. . .b4  
BLU3-0  
b3. . .b0  
Colour  
entry  
Red  
Green  
0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0  
...  
0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0  
...  
0 0 0 0  
1 1 1 1  
...  
0
1
Yellow  
Blue  
...  
14  
15  
Magenta  
Cyan  
1 1 1 1  
1 1 1 1  
1 1 1 1  
1 1 1 1  
0 0 0 0  
1 1 1 1  
White  
Table 13 CLUT Colour values  
Foreground Colour  
CC: The foreground colour can be chosen from 8 colours  
on a character by character basis. Two sets of 8 colours  
are provided. A serial attribute switches between the  
banks (see Table 18 Serial Mode 1, bit 7). The colours are  
the CLUT entries 0 to 7 or 8 to 15.  
Table 14 Foreground CLUT mapping  
Background Colour  
CC: This attribute is valid from the time set until end of row  
or otherwise modified if set with Serial Mode 0. If set with  
Serial Mode 1, then the colour is set from the next  
character onwards.  
The background colour can be chosen from all 16 CLUT  
entries.  
2001 Jan 18  
43  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TXT: The control character “New background” (“1Dh”) is  
used to change the background colour to the current  
foreground colour. The selection is immediate (“Set at”)  
and remains valid until the end of the row or until otherwise  
modified.  
CC: The overline attribute (see Table 18, Serial Mode 0/1,  
bit 5) is valid from the time set until end of row or otherwise  
modified. Overlining of Italic characters is not possible.  
TXT: This attribute is not available.  
The TEXT background control characters map to the  
CLUT entries as shown below:  
END OF ROW  
CC: The number of characters in a row is flexible and can  
determined by the end of row attribute (see Table 18,  
Serial Mode 1, bit 9). However the maximum number of  
character positions displayed is determined by the setting  
of the REG2:Text Position Horizontal and REG4:Text Area  
End.  
NOTE: When using the end of row attribute the next  
character location after the attribute should always be  
occupied by a ’space’.  
Control Code  
00h+1Dh  
01h+1Dh  
02h+1Dh  
03h+1Dh  
04h+1Dh  
05h+1Dh  
06h+1Dh  
07h+1Dh  
Defined Colour  
Black  
CLUT Entry  
8
Red  
9
Green  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
TXT: This attribute is not available, Row length is fixed at  
40 characters.  
Yellow  
Blue  
Magenta  
Cyan  
FRINGING  
A fringe (shadow) can be defined around characters. The  
fringe direction is individually selectable in any of the  
North, South, East and West direction using  
REG3:Fringing Control. The colour of the fringe can also  
be defined as one of the entries in the CLUT, again using  
REG3:Fringing Control.  
CC: The fringe attribute (see Table 18, Serial Mode 0, bit  
9) is valid from the time set until the end of the row or  
otherwise modified.  
TXT: The display of fringing in TXT mode is controlled by  
the TXT4.SHADOW bit. When set all the alphanumeric  
characters being displayed are shadowed, graphics  
characters are not shadowed.  
White  
Table 15 Background CLUT mapping  
BACKGROUND DURATION  
The attribute when set takes effect from the current  
position until to the end of the text display defined in  
REG4:Text Area End.  
CC: The background duration attribute (see Table 18,  
Serial Mode 1, bit 8) in combination with the End Of Row  
attribute (see Table 18, Serial Mode 1, bit 9) forces the  
background colour to be display on the row until the end of  
the text area is reached.  
TXT: This attribute is not available.  
UNDERLINE  
The underline attribute causes the characters to have the  
bottom scan line of the character cell forced to foreground  
colour, including spaces. If background duration is set,  
then underline is set until the end of the text area.  
CC: The underline attribute (see Table 18, Serial Mode  
0/1, bit 4) is valid from the time set until end of row or  
otherwise modified.  
TXT: This attribute is not available.  
OVERLINE  
Fig.15 South and Southwest Fringing  
The overline attribute causes the characters to have the  
top scan line of the character cell forced to foreground  
colour, including spaces. If background duration is set,  
then overline is set until the end of the text area.  
MESHING  
The attribute effects the background colour being  
displayed. Alternate pixels are displayed as the  
background colour or video.The structure is offset by 1  
2001 Jan 18  
44  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
pixel from scan line to scan line, thus achieving a checker  
board display of the background colour and video.  
TXT: There are two meshing attributes one that only  
affects black background colours TXT4.BMESH and a  
second that only affects backgrounds other than black  
TXT4.CMESH. A black background is defined as CLUT  
entry 8, a none black background is defined as CLUT entry  
9-15.  
SPECIAL GRAPHICS CHARACTERS  
CC/TXT: Several special characters are provided for  
improved OSD effects. These characters provide a choice  
of 4 colours within a character cell. The total number of  
special graphics characters is limited to 16. They are  
stored in the character codes 8Xh and 9Xh of the character  
table (32 ROM characters), or in the DRCs which overlay  
character codes 8Xh and 9Xh. Each special graphics  
character uses two consecutive normal characters.  
Fringing, underline and overline is not possible for special  
graphics characters. Special graphics characters are  
activated when TXT21.OSD_PLANE = 1.  
CC: The setting of the Mesh bit in REG0:Display Control  
has the effect of meshing any background colour.  
Background Colour  
“set at” (Mode 0)  
Serial Attribute  
Background Colour  
“set after” (Mode 1)  
VOLUME  
Foreground Colour  
Normal Character  
Background Colour  
Foreground Colour 7  
Foreground Colour 6  
Special Character  
Fig.16 Meshing and Meshing / Fringing (South+West)  
Fig.18 Special Character Example  
CURSOR  
The example in Fig.18 can be done with 8 special graphics  
characters.  
The cursor operates by reversing the background and  
foreground colours in the character position pointed to by  
the active cursor position. The cursor is enabled using  
TXT7.CURSOR ON. When active, the row the cursor  
appears on is defined by TXT9.R<4:0> and the column is  
defined by TXT10.C<5:0>. The position of the cursor can  
be fixed using TXT9.CURSOR FREEZE.  
If the screen colour is transparent (implicit in mixed mode)  
and inside the object the box attribute is set, then the  
object is surrounded by video. If the box attribute is not set  
the background colour inside the object will also be  
displayed as transparent.  
CC: The valid range for row is 0 to 15. The valid range for  
column is 0 to 47. The cursor remains rectangular at all  
times, it’s shape is not affected by italic attribute, therefore  
it is not advised to use the cursor with italic characters.  
TXT: The valid range for row positioning is 0 to 24.The  
valid range for column is 0 to 39.  
Plane  
1 0  
Colour Allocation  
0 0  
0 1  
1 0  
1 1  
Background Colour  
Foreground Colour  
CLUT entry 6  
CLUT entry 7  
A B C D E F  
Table 16 Special Character Colour allocation  
Fig.17 Cursor Display  
2001 Jan 18  
45  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Character and Attribute Coding  
CC MODE  
Character coding is split into character oriented attributes (parallel) and character group coding (serial). The serial  
attributes take effect either at the position of the attribute (Set At), or at the following location (Set After) and remain  
effective until either modified by a new serial attribute or until the end of the row. A serial attribute is represented as a  
space (the space character itself however is not used for this purpose), the attributes that are still active, e.g. overline  
and underline will be visible during the display of the space. The default setting at the start of a row is:  
1x size, flash and italics OFF  
overline and underline OFF  
Display mode = superimpose  
fringing OFF  
background colour duration = 0  
end of row = 0  
The coding is done in 12 bit words. The codes are stored sequentially in the display memory. A maximum of 768  
character positions can be defined for a single display.  
PARALLEL CHARACTER CODING  
Bits  
0-7  
8-10  
11  
Description  
8 bit character code  
3 bits for 8 foreground colours  
Mode bit:  
0 = Parallel code  
Table 17 Parallel Character Coding  
2001 Jan 18  
46  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
SERIAL CHARACTER CODING  
Bits  
Description  
Serial Mode 0  
(“set at”)  
Serial Mode 1  
Char.Pos. 1 (“set at”)  
Char.Pos. >1 (“set after”)  
0-3  
4
4 bits for 16 Background  
colours  
4 bits for 16 Background colours  
4 bits for 16 Background colours  
0 = Underline OFF  
1 = Underline ON  
Horizontal Size:  
0 = normal  
1 = x2  
0 = Underline OFF  
1 = Underline ON  
5
6
7
8
0 = Overline OFF  
1 = Overline ON  
Vertical Size:  
0 = normal  
1 = x2  
0 = Overline OFF  
1 = Overline ON  
Display mode:  
0 = Superimpose  
1 = Boxing  
Display mode:  
0 = Superimpose  
1 = Boxing  
Display mode:  
0 = Superimpose  
1 = Boxing  
0 = Flash OFF  
1 = Flash ON  
Foreground colour switch  
0 = Bank 0 (colours 0-7)  
1 = Bank 1 (colours 8-15)  
Foreground colour switch  
0 = Bank 0 (colours 0-7)  
1 = Bank 1 (colours 8-15)  
0 = Italics OFF  
1 = Italics ON  
Background colour duration:  
0 = stop BGC  
Background colour duration  
(set at):  
1 = set BGC to end of row  
0 = stop BGC  
1 = set BGC to end of row  
9
0 = Fringing OFF  
1 = Fringing ON  
End of Row  
0 = Continue Row  
1 = End Row  
End of Row (set at):  
0 = Continue Row  
1 = End Row  
10  
Switch for Serial coding  
mode 0 and 1:  
Switch for Serial coding mode 0  
and 1:  
Switch for Serial coding mode 0  
and 1:  
0 = mode 0  
Mode bit:  
1 = mode 1  
Mode bit:  
1 = mode 1  
Mode bit:  
11  
1 = Serial code  
1 = Serial code  
1 = Serial code  
Table 18 Serial Character Coding  
(Set At), or at the following location (Set After). The  
attribute remainseffective until either modified by new  
serial attributes or until the end of the row.The default  
settings at the start of a row is:  
TXT MODE  
Character coding is in a serial format, with only one  
attributes being changed at any single location. The serial  
attributes take effect either at the position of the attribute  
foreground colour white (CLUT Address 7)  
background colour black (CLUT Address 8)  
2001 Jan 18  
47  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Horizontal size x1, Vertical size x1 (normal size)  
Alphanumeric ON  
Contiguous Mosaic Graphics  
Release Mosaics  
Flash, Box, Conceal and Twist OFF  
The attributes have individual codes which are defined in the basic character table below:  
E/W = 0  
E/W = 1  
b7  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
b6  
b5  
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
bits  
0
1
1
0
1
1
b4  
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
b3 b2 b1 b0  
column0  
1
2 2a 3 3a 4 5 6 6a 7 7a 8 8a  
9 9a  
D E F  
D E F  
B C  
A
O
O
O
graphics  
black  
graphics  
red  
graphics  
green  
graphics  
yellow  
graphics  
blue  
graphics  
magenta  
graphics  
cyan  
graphics  
white  
alpha  
Nat  
Opt  
O
Nat  
Opt  
bkgnd  
black  
bkgnd  
red  
S
S
S
0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 1  
0 0 1 0  
0 0 1 1  
0 1 0 0  
0 1 0 1  
0 1 1 0  
0 1 1 1  
1 0 0 0  
1 0 0 1  
1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 1  
1 1 0 0  
1 1 0 1  
1 1 1 0  
1 1 1 1  
S
0
black  
alpha  
red  
alpha  
green  
alpha  
yellow  
alpha  
blue  
alpha  
magenta  
alpha  
cyan  
D
D
D
D
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
S
S
S
1
D
D
D
D
O
O
bkgnd  
green  
bkgnd  
yellow  
bkgnd  
blue  
bkgnd  
magenta  
bkgnd  
cyan  
bkgnd  
white  
S
S
S
S
2
D
D
D
D
O
O
O
O
O
O
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
3
D
D
D
D
O
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
4
D
D
D
D
O
S
S
S
S
5
D
D
D
D
O
S
S
S
S
6
D
D
D
D
O
alpha  
white  
S
S
S
S
7
D
D
D
D
conceal  
display  
contiguous  
graphics  
separated  
graphics  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
flash  
S
S
S
S
8
D
D
D
D
O
steady  
S
S
S
S
9
D
D
D
D
O
end  
box  
start  
box  
normal  
height  
double  
height  
double  
width  
double  
size  
S
S
S
S
A
B
C
D
E
F
D
D
D
D
O
Nat  
Opt  
Nat  
Opt  
S
twist  
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
O
black  
bkgnd  
new  
bkgnd  
hold  
graphics  
release  
graphics  
Nat  
Opt  
norm sz  
OSD  
dbl ht  
OSD  
dbl wd  
OSD  
dbl sz  
OSD  
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
O
Nat  
Opt  
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
O
O
O
O
Nat  
Opt  
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
O
O
O
O
Nat  
Opt  
S
S
S
S
D
D
D
D
Fig.19 TXT Basic Character Set (Pan-European)  
2001 Jan 18  
48  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Screen and Global Controls  
DISPLAY MODES  
A number of attributes are available that affect the whole  
display region, and cannot be applied selectively to  
regions of the display.  
CC: When attributes superimpose or when boxing (see  
Table 18, Serial Mode 0/1, bit 6) is set, the resulting display  
depends on the setting of the following screen control  
mode bits in REG0:Display Control.  
TV SCAN LINES PER ROW  
The number of TV scan lines per field used for each  
display row can be defined, the value is independent of the  
character size being used. The number of lines can be  
either 10/13/16 per display row. The number of TV scan  
lines per row is defined TXT21.DISP_LINES<1:0>.  
A value of 9 lines per row can be achieved if the display is  
forced into 525 line display mode by  
TXT17.DISP_FORCE<1:0>, or if the device is in 10 line  
mode and the automatic detection circuitry within display  
finds 525 line display syncs.  
Display Mode  
Video  
MOD  
1 0  
Description  
0 0  
Video mode disables all display  
activities and sets the RGB to true  
black and VDS to video.  
Full Text  
0 1  
Full Text mode displays screen  
colour at all locations not covered by  
character foreground or background  
colour. The box attribute has no  
effect.  
CHARACTER MATRIX (HXV)  
Mixed Screen  
Colour  
1 0  
1 1  
Mixed Screen mode displays screen  
colour at all locations not covered by  
character foreground, within boxed  
areas or, background colour.  
There are four different character matrices available, these  
are 12x10, 12x13, and 12x16. The selection is made using  
TXT21.CHAR_SIZE<1:0> and is independent of the  
number of display lines per row.  
If the character matrix is less than the number of TV scan  
lines per row then the matrix is padded with blank lines. If  
the character matrix is greater than the number of TV scan  
lines then the character is truncated.  
Mixed Video  
Mixed Video mode displays video at  
all locations not covered by  
character foreground, within boxed  
areas or, background colour.  
Table 19 Display Modes  
TXT: The display mode is controlled by the bits in the TXT5  
and TXT6. There are 3 control functions - Text on,  
Background on and Picture on. Separate sets of bits are  
used inside and outside Teletext boxes so that different  
display modes can be invoked. TXT6 is used if the  
newsflash (C5) or subtitle (C6) bits in row 25 of the basic  
page memory are set otherwise TXT5 is used. This allows  
the software to set up the type of display required on  
newsflash and subtitle pages (e.g. text inside boxes, TV  
picture outside) this will be invoked without any further  
software intervention when such a page is acquired.  
Background  
Picture On  
Text On  
Effect  
On  
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
x
Text mode, black screen  
Text mode, background always black  
Text mode  
0
1
x
Video mode  
0
Mixed text and TV mode  
Text mode, TV picture outside text area  
1
Table 20 TXT Display Control Bits  
2001 Jan 18  
49  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Screen Colour  
Screen colour is displayed from 10.5 ms to 62.5 ms after  
the active edge of the HSync input and on TV lines 23 to  
310 inclusive, for a 625 line display, and lines 17 to 260  
inclusive for a 525 line display.  
The screen colour is defined by REG0:Display Control and  
points to a location in the CLUT table. The screen colour  
covers the full video width. It is visible when the Full Text  
or Mixed Screen Colour mode is set and no foreground or  
background pixels are being displayed.  
Display Memory  
Text Area  
ROW  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display  
possible  
Soft Scrolling  
display possible  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Text Display Controls  
Display  
possible  
TEXT DISPLAY CONFIGURATION  
Two types of area are possible. The one area is static and  
the other is dynamic. The dynamic area allows scrolling of  
a region to take place. The areas cannot cross each other.  
Only one scroll region is possible.  
Display Map  
The display map allows a flexible allocation of data in the  
memory to individual rows.  
Sixteen words are provided in the display memory for this  
purpose. The lower 10 bits address the first word in the  
memory where the row data starts. This value is an offset  
in terms of 16-bit words from the start of Display Memory  
(8000 Hex). The most significant bit enables the display  
Fig.20 Display Map and Data Pointers  
when not within the scroll (dynamic) area.  
SOFT SCROLL ACTION  
The display map memory is fixed at the first 16 words in  
the closed caption display memory.  
The dynamic scroll region is defined by the REG5:Scroll  
Area, REG6:Scroll Range, REG14:Top Scroll line and the  
REG8:Status Register. The scroll area is enabled when  
the SCON bit is set in REG8: Status.  
b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0  
Pointer to Row Data  
The position of the soft scroll area window is defined using  
the Soft Scroll Position (SSP<3:0), and the height of the  
window is defined using the Soft Scroll Height (SSH<3:0>)  
both are in REG6:Scroll Range. The rows that are scrolled  
through the window are defined using the Start Scroll Row  
(STS<3:0>) and the Stop Scroll Row (SPS<3:0>) both are  
in REG5:Scroll Area.  
Reserved, should be set to 0  
Text Display Enable, valid outside Soft Scroll Area  
0 = Disable  
1 = Enable  
Table 21 Display map Bit Allocation  
The soft scrolling function is done by modifying the Scroll  
Line (SCL<3:0>) in REG14: Top Scroll Line. and the first  
scroll row value SCR<3:0> in REG8:Status. If the number  
of rows allocated to the scroll counter is larger than the  
defined visible scroll area, this allows parts of rows at the  
top and bottom to be displayed during the scroll function.  
The registers can be written throughout the field and the  
values are updated for display with the next field sync.  
Care should be taken that the register pairs are written to  
by the software in the same field.  
Only a region that contains only single height rows or only  
double height rows can be scrolled.  
2001 Jan 18  
50  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
ROW  
0
1
2
Horizontal Sync.  
Usable for OSD Display  
Start Scroll Row  
STS<3:0> e.g. 3  
Vertical  
Sync.  
6 Lines  
Offset  
Screen Colour Offset = 8µs  
Should not be used for  
OSD Display  
3
4
5
6
Soft Scroll Position  
Pointer SSP<3:0> e.g. 6  
Screen Colour Area  
Soft Scroll Height  
SSH<3:0> e.g.4  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Soft Scrolling Area  
Text  
Vertical  
Offset  
H-Sync delay  
Text Area  
Should not be used for  
OSD Display  
Stop Scroll Row  
SPS<3:0> e.g. 11  
Usable for OSD Display  
0.25 char. offset  
Fig.21 Soft Scroll Area  
Text Area Start  
Text Area End  
56µs  
Fig.23 Display Area Positioning  
0-63 lines  
ROW  
0
row0  
1
2
3
4
5
row1  
P01 NBC  
SCREEN COLOUR DISPLAY AREA  
row2  
row3  
row4  
Scroll Area  
Offset  
This area is covered by the screen colour. The screen  
colour display area starts with a fixed offset of 8 us from  
the leading edge of the horizontal sync pulse in the  
horizontal direction. A vertical offset is not necessary.  
row5  
row6  
row7  
row8  
6
7
8
9
Closed Captioning data row n  
Closed Captioning data row n+1  
Closed Captioning data row n+2  
Closed Captioning data row n+3  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Visible area  
for scrolling  
Horizontal  
Vertical  
starts 8 us after the leading edge of H-Sync for 56  
us.  
Closed Captioning data row n+4  
row13  
row14  
line 9, field 1 (321, field 2) with respect to leading  
edge of vertical sync (line numbering using 625  
Standard).  
Fig.22 CC Text Areas  
Table 22 Screen Colour Display Area  
Display Positioning  
TEXT DISPLAY AREA  
The display consists of the Screen Colour covering the  
whole screen and the Text Area that is placed within the  
visible screen area. The screen colour extends over a  
large vertical and horizontal range so that no offset is  
needed. The text area is offset in both directions relative to  
the vertical and horizontal sync pulses.  
The text area can be defined to start with an offset in both  
the horizontal and vertical direction.  
Horizontal  
Up to 48 full sized characters per row.  
Start position setting from 3 to 64 characters from  
the leading edge of H-Sync. Fine adjustment in  
quarter characters.  
Vertical  
256 lines (nominal 41- 297).  
Start position setting from leading edge of vertical  
sync legal values are 4 to 64 lines.  
(line numbering using 625 Standard)  
Table 23 Text Display Area  
The horizontal offset is set in REG2: Text Area Start. The  
offset is done in full width characters using TAS<5:0> and  
quarter characters using HOP<1:0> for fine setting. The  
2001 Jan 18  
51  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
values 00h to 03h for TAS<5:0> will result in a corrupted  
display.  
ROM ADDRESSING  
Three ROM’s are used to generate the correct pixel  
information. The first contains the National Option look-up  
table, the second contains the Basic Character look-up  
table and the third contains the Character Pixel  
information. Although these are individual ROM, since  
they do not need to be accessed simultaneously they are  
all combined into a single ROM unit.  
The width of the text area is defined in REG4:Text Area  
End by setting the end character value TAE<5:0>. This  
number determines where the background colour of the  
Text Area will end if set to extend to the end of the row. It  
will also terminate the character fetch process thus  
eliminating the necessity of a row end attribute. This  
entails however writing to all positions.  
2400H  
The vertical offset is set in REG1:Text Position Vertical  
Register. The offset value VOL<5:0> is done in number of  
TV scan lines.  
CHAR PIXEL  
DATA  
0800  
71680 x 12 bits  
NOTE: REG1:Text Position Vertical Register should not  
be set to 00 Hex as the Display Busy interrupt is not  
generated in these circumstances.  
Look-Up Set3  
Approx. 710 Text  
or  
0600  
0400  
0200  
0000  
430Text +176CC  
Look-Up Set2  
Look-Up Set1  
Look-Up Set 0  
Character Set  
To facilitate the global nature of the device the character  
set has the ability to accommodate a large number of  
characters, which can be stored in different matrices.  
0800H  
0000H  
LOOK-UP  
Basic + Nat Opt  
2048 location  
CHARACTER MATRICES  
The character matrices that can be accommodated are: -  
(HxVxPlanes) 12x9x1, 12x10x1, 12x13x1, 12x16x1.  
These modes allow two colours per character position.  
In CC mode two additional character matrices are  
available to allow four colours per character: -  
(HxVxPlanes) 12x13x2, 12x16x2.  
Fig.24 ROM Organisation  
The characters are stored physically in ROM in a matrix of  
size either 12x10 or 12x16.  
CHARACTER SET SELECTION  
Four character sets are available in the device. A set can  
consist of alphanumeric characters as required by the  
WST Teletext or FCC Closed Captioning, Customer  
definable On-Screen Display characters, and Special  
Graphic characters.  
CC:- Only a single character set can be used for display  
and this is selected using the Basic Set selection  
TXT18.BS<1:0>. When selecting a character set in CC  
mode the Twist Set selection TXT18.TS<1:0> should be  
set to the same value as TXT18.BS<1:0> for correct  
operation.  
TXT:- Two character sets can be displayed at once. These  
are the basic G0 set or the alternative G0 set (Twist Set).  
The basic set is selected using TXT18.BS<1:0>, The  
alternative/twist character set is defined by  
TXT19.TS<1:0>. Since the alternative character set is an  
option it can be enabled or disabled using TXT19.TEN,  
and the language code that is defined for the alternative  
set is defined by TXT19.TC<2:0>.  
2001 Jan 18  
52  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
CHARACTER TABLE  
The character table is shown in Table 24:-  
Character code columns (Bits 4-7)  
0
1
®
˚
2
SP  
!
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
4
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
5
P
Q
R
S
6
ú
a
b
c
7
p
q
r
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
1/2  
¿
"
#
$
%
&
´
3
s
4
¢
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
d
e
t
5
u
v
w
x
y
z
6
£
f
7
G
H
I
g
h
i
8
à
_
è
â
ê
î
(
9
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
á
+
,
J
j
;
K
L
M
N
O
k
l
ç
<
=
>
?
é
-
]
m
n
o
Ñ
ñ
n
ô
û
.
í
/
ó
Table 24 Closed Caption Character Table  
Special Characters are in column 8.  
Additional table locations for normal characters  
Table locations for normal characters  
Re-definable Characters  
A number of Dynamically Re-definable Characters (DRC) are available. These are mapped onto the normal character  
codes, and replace the pre-defined OTP character Rom value.  
There are 32 DRCs which occupy character codes 80H to 9FH. Alternatively, These locations can be utilized as 16  
special graphics characters. The remapping of the standard OSD to the DRCs is activated when the TXT21.DRCS  
ENABLE bit is set. The selection of Normal or Special OSD symbols is defined by the TXT21.OSD PLANES.  
Each character is stored in a matrix of 16x16x1 (V x H x planes), this allows for all possible character matrices to be  
defined within a single location.  
2001 Jan 18  
53  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
DRCs are defined by writing data to the DRC RAM using  
the 80C51 MOVX command. Setting bits 3 to 9 of the first  
line of a 12 wide by 16 line character would require setting  
the high byte of the 80C51 data pointer to 88H, the low  
byte of the 80C51 data pointer to 00H, using the MOVX  
command to load address 8800H with data F8H,  
Micro Address  
8800  
Char Code  
80h  
CHAR 0  
CHAR 1  
CHAR 0  
A
12 bits  
Address  
881F  
8820  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
81h  
82h  
883F  
8840  
CHAR 2  
incrementing the data pointer, and finally using the MOVX  
command to load address 8801H with data 03H.  
885F  
Display Synchronization  
The horizontal and vertical synchronizing signals from the  
TV deflection are used as inputs. Both signals can be  
inverted before being delivered to the Phase Selector  
section.  
CC: The polarity is controlled using either VPOL or HPOL  
in REG2:Text position Vertical.  
8BC0  
CHAR 30  
CHAR 31  
9Eh  
9Fh  
8BDF  
8BE0  
8BFF  
Fig.25 Organisation of DRC RAM  
TXT: SFRs bits TXT1.HPOL & TXT1.VPOL control the  
polarity.  
DEFINING CHARACTERS  
A line locked 12 MHz clock is derived from the 12MHz free  
running oscillator by the Phase Selector. This line locked  
clock is used to clock the whole of the Display block.  
The H & V Sync signals are synchronized with the 12 MHz  
clock before being used in the display section.  
The DRC RAM is mapped on to the 80C51 RAM address  
space and starts at location 8800H. The character matrix  
is 12 bits wide and therefore requires two bytes to be  
written for each word, the first byte (even addresses),  
addresses the lower 8 bits and the second byte (odd  
addresses) addresses the upper 4 bits.  
For characters of 9, 10 or 16 lines high the pixel  
information starts in the first address and continues  
sequentially for the required number of addresses.  
Characters of 13 lines high are defined with an initial offset  
of 1 address, this is to allow for correct generation of  
fringing across boundaries of clustered characters (see  
Fig.26). The characters continue sequentially for 13 lines  
after which a further line can again be used for generation  
of correct fringing across boundaries of clustered  
characters.  
Video/Data Switch (Fast Blanking) Polarity  
The polarity of the Video/Data (Fast Blanking) signal can  
be inverted. The polarity is set with the VDSPOL in REG7:  
RGB Brightness register.  
VDSP  
OL  
VDS  
Condition  
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
RGB display  
Video Display  
RGB display  
Video Display  
Line 13 from  
character above  
Top Left  
Pixel  
MSB  
Line  
No.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hex  
440  
003  
00C  
030  
0C0  
300  
C00  
C00  
300  
C00  
030  
00C  
003  
000  
1A8  
000  
LSB  
Fringing  
Top Line  
Table 25 Fast Blanking Signal Polarity  
Video/Data Switch Adjustment  
8
9
To take into account the delay between the RGB values  
and the VDS signal due to external buffering, the VDS  
signal can be moved in relation to the RGB signals. The  
VDS signal can be set to be either a clock cycle before or  
after the RGB signal, or coincident with the RGB signal.  
This is done using VDEL<2:0> in REG15:Configuration.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Bottom Line  
Fringing  
Line not used  
Bottom Right  
Pixel  
Line 1 from  
character below  
Fig.26 13 Line High DRC’s Character Format  
2001 Jan 18  
54  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
RGB Brightness Control  
This output is intended to act on the TV’s display circuits to  
reduce contrast of the video when it is active. The result of  
contrast reduction is to improve the readability of the text  
in a mixed teletext and video display.  
The bits in the TXT5 & TXT6 SFRs allow the display to be  
set up so that, for example, the areas inside teletext boxes  
will be contrast reduced when a subtitle is being displayed  
but that the rest of the screen will be displayed as normal  
video.  
A brightness control is provided to allow the RGB upper  
output voltage level to be modified. The RGB amplitude  
may be varied between 60% and 100%.  
The brightness is set in the RGB Brightness register as  
follows: -  
BRI3-0  
0 0 0 0  
...  
RGB Brightness  
Lowest value  
...  
CC: This feature is not available in CC mode.  
Memory Mapped Registers  
The memory mapped registers are used to control the  
display. The registers are mapped into the Microcontroller  
MOVX address space, starting at address 87F0h and  
extending to 87FF.  
1 1 1 1  
Highest value  
Table 26 RGB Brightness  
Contrast Reduction  
TXT: The COR bits in SFRs TXT5 & TXT6 control when  
the COR output of the device is activated (i.e. Pulled-low).  
MMR MAP  
ADD R/W  
Names  
BIT7  
SRC<3>  
VPOL  
BIT6  
SRC<2>  
HPOL  
BIT5  
SRC<1>  
VOL<5>  
BIT4  
SRC<0>  
VOL<4>  
BIT3  
-
BIT2  
MSH  
BIT1  
MOD<1>  
VOL<1>  
BIT0  
MOD<0>  
VOL<0>  
87F0  
R/W  
Display Control  
87F1  
R/W  
Text  
Position  
VOL<3>  
VOL<2>  
Vertical  
87F2  
R/W  
Text Area Start  
Fringing Control  
Text Area End  
Scroll Area  
HOP<1>  
FRC<3>  
-
HOP<0>  
FRC<2>  
-
TAS<5>  
FRC<1>  
TAE<5>  
SSH<1>  
SPS<1>  
-
TAS<4>  
FRC<0>  
TAE<4>  
SSH<0>  
SPS<0>  
-
TAS<3>  
FRDN  
TAS<2>  
FRDE  
TAS<1>  
FRDS  
TAS<0>  
FRDW  
87F3  
R/W  
87F4  
R/W  
TAE<3>  
SSP<3>  
STS<3>  
BRI<3>  
SCR<3>  
SCR<3>  
HSD<3>  
VSD<3>  
TAE<2>  
SSP<2>  
STS<2>  
BRI<2>  
SCR<2>  
SCR<2>  
HSD<3>  
VSD<2>  
TAE<1>  
SSP<1>  
STS<1>  
BRI<1>  
SCR<1>  
SCR<1>  
HSD<1>  
TAE<0>  
SSP<0>  
STS<0>  
BRI<0>  
SCR<0>  
SCR<0>  
HSD<0>  
87F5  
R/W  
SSH<3>  
SPS<3>  
VDSPOL  
BUSY  
-
SSH<2>  
SPS<2>  
-
87F6  
R/W  
Scroll Range  
87F7  
R/W  
RGB Bright.ness  
87F8  
R
Status read  
FIELD  
-
SCON  
FLR  
87F8  
W
Status write  
SCON  
FLR  
87FC  
R/W  
H-Sync. Delay  
V-Sync. Delay  
Top Scroll Line  
Configuration  
-
HSD<6>  
HSD<5>  
HSD<4>  
87FD  
R/W  
-
-
VSD<6>  
-
VSD<5>  
-
VSD<4>  
-
VSD<1>  
SCL<1>  
VSD<0>  
SCL<0>  
87FE  
R/W  
SCL<3>  
TXT/V  
SCL<2>  
87FF  
R/W  
CC  
VDEL<2>  
VDEL<1>  
VDEL<0>  
-
-
-
Table 27 MMR Memory Map  
2001 Jan 18  
55  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
MMR BIT DEFINITION  
Names  
ADD  
BIT7  
BIT6  
BIT5  
BIT4  
BIT3  
BIT2  
BIT1  
BIT0  
RESET  
Display Control.  
87F0  
SRC<3>  
SRC<2>  
SRC<1>  
SRC<0>  
-
MSH  
MOD<1>  
MOD<0>  
00H  
SRC<3:0>  
MSH  
Screen Colour definition  
0 - No meshing of background  
1 - Meshing all background colours  
MOD<1:0>  
00 - Video  
01 - Full Text  
10 - Mixed Screen Colour  
11 - Mixed Video  
Text Position  
Vertical  
87F1  
VPOL  
HPOL  
VOL<5>  
VOL<4>  
VOL<3>  
VOL<2>  
VOL<1>  
VOL<0>  
00H  
VPOL  
0 - Input polarity  
1 - Inverted input polarity  
HPOL  
0 - Input Polarity  
1 - Inverted input polarity  
VOL<5:0>  
Display start Vertical Offset from V-Sync. (lines)  
87F2 HOP<1> HOP<0> TAS<5>  
Text Area Start  
TAS<4>  
FRC<0>  
TAS<3>  
FRDN  
TAS<2>  
FRDE  
TAS<1>  
FRDS  
TAS<0>  
FRDW  
00H  
00H  
HOP<1:0>  
Fine Horizontal Offset in quarter of characters  
Text area start  
TAS<5:0>  
Fringing Control.  
87F3  
FRC<3>  
FRC<2>  
FRC<1>  
FRC<3:0>  
FRDN  
Fringing colour, value address of CLUT  
0 - No fringe in North direction  
1 - Fringe in North direction  
FRDE  
FRDS  
0 - No fringe in East direction  
1 - Fringe in East direction  
0 - No fringe in South direction  
1 - Fringe in South direction  
FRDW  
0 - No fringe in West direction  
1 - Fringe in West direction  
Text Area End  
87F4  
Text Area End, in full characters  
87F5 SSH<3>  
-
-
TAE<5>  
SSH<1>  
TAE<4>  
SSH<0>  
TAE<3>  
SSP<3>  
TAE<2>  
SSP<2>  
TAE<1>  
SSP<1>  
TAE<0>  
SSP<0>  
00H  
00H  
TAE<5:0>  
Scroll Area  
SSH<2>  
SPS<2>  
-
SSH<3:0>  
Soft Scroll Height  
Soft Scroll Position  
SSP<3:0>  
Scroll Range  
87F6  
SPS<3>  
SPS<1>  
SPS<0>  
STS<3>  
BRI<3>  
STS<2>  
BRI<2>  
STS<1>  
BRI<1>  
STS<0>  
BRI<0>  
00H  
00H  
SPS<3:0>  
Stop Scroll row  
Start Scroll row  
STS<3:0>  
RGB Brightness  
87F7  
VDSPOL  
-
-
2001 Jan 18  
56  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
VDSPOL  
BRI<3:0>  
VDS Polarity  
0 - RGB (1), Video (0)  
1 - RGB (0), Video (1)  
RGB Brightness control  
Status read  
87F8  
BUSY  
FIELD  
SCON  
FLR  
SCR<3>  
SCR<2>  
SCR<1>  
SCR<0>  
00H  
BUSY  
FIELD  
0 - Access to display memory will not cause display problems  
1 - Access to display memory could cause display problems.  
0 - Odd Field  
1 - Even Field  
FLR  
0 - Active flash region foreground and background displayed  
1 - Active flash region background only displayed  
SCR<3:0>  
First scroll row  
Status write  
87F8  
-
-
SCON  
FLR  
SCR<3>  
SCR<2>  
SCR<1>  
SCR<0>  
00H  
SCON  
FLR  
0 - Scroll area disabled  
1 - Scroll area enabled  
0 - Active flash region foreground and background colour displayed  
1 - Active flash region background colour only displayed  
SCR<3:0>  
First Scroll Row  
H-Sync. delay  
HSD<6:0>  
V-Sync Delay  
87FC  
H-Sync delay, in full size characters  
87FD VSD<6>  
V-Sync delay in number of TV lines  
-
HSD<6>  
HSD<5>  
HSD<4>  
HSD<3>  
VSD<3>  
HSD<3>  
VSD<2>  
HSD<1>  
VSD<1>  
HSD<0>  
VSD<0>  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
-
VSD<5>  
-
VSD<4>  
-
VSD<6:0>  
Top Scroll Line  
87FE  
-
-
SCL<3>  
SCL<2>  
SCL<1>  
SCL<0>  
SCL<3:0>  
Top line for scroll  
Configuration  
87FF  
CC  
VDEL<2>  
VDEL<1>  
VDEL<0>  
TXT/V  
-
-
-
CC  
0 - OSD mode  
1 - Closed Caption mode  
VDEL<2:0>  
Pixel delay between VDS and RGB output  
000 - VDS switched to video, not active  
001 - VDS active one pixel earlier then RGB  
010 - VDS synchronous to RGB  
100 - VDS active one pixel after RGB  
TXT/V  
BUSY Signal switch  
1 - Horizontal  
0 - Vertical  
Table 28 MMR Descriptions  
2001 Jan 18  
57  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
OTP MEMORY  
security bits are one-time programmable and CANNOT be  
erased.  
These may be programmed either using the Parallel  
Programming Interface or via the ISP Programming  
Interface.  
Parallel Programming  
The following pins form the parallel programming  
interface:-  
Pin  
Name  
IO(0)  
IO(1)  
IO(2)  
IO(3)  
IO(4)  
IO(5)  
IO(6)  
IO(7)  
OEB  
Function  
P0.5  
P0.6  
P1.0  
P1.1  
P1.2  
P1.3  
P3.1  
P3.2  
P2.0  
Bit 0:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 1:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 2:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 3:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 4:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 5:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 6:- Address/Data/Mode  
Bit 7:- Address/Data/Mode  
Output Enable  
0 = IO is output  
1 = IO is input  
P3.0  
WEB  
Write Enable, programming pulse  
>100us  
0 = Program  
P1.6  
P1.7  
MODE  
A/DB  
0 = IO(7:0) defined by A/DB  
1 = IO(7:0) contains mode information  
0 = IO(7:0) contains Data  
1
=
IO(7:0) contains Address  
Information  
P3.3  
VPE  
Unused  
VPE  
RESET  
CLK  
9V Programming Voltage  
Device reset/ mode selection  
Clock 4 MHz  
RESET  
XTALIN  
Table 29 Parallel Programming Interface  
ISecurity Bits  
The family of devices have a set of security bits for the  
combined OTP Program ROM, Character ROM and  
Packet 26 ROM. The security bits are used to prevent the  
ROM from being overwritten once programmed, and also  
the contents being verified once programmed. The  
2001 Jan 18  
58  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
The memory and security bits are structured as follows:-  
MEMORY  
SECURITY BITS INTERACTION  
PROGRAM  
ROM  
USER ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
TEST ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
Verify  
(Enable/Disable)  
USER ROM  
(i.e. 128k x 8 bits)  
=
=
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
TEST ROM  
RESERVED  
(1k x 8 bits)  
Yes  
CHARACTER  
ROM  
USER ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
TEST ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
Verify  
(Enable/Disable)  
USER ROM  
(9k x 12 bits)  
=
=
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
TEST ROM  
RESERVED  
(0.5k x 12 bits)  
Yes  
PACKET 26  
ROM  
USER ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
TEST ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
Verify  
(Enable/Disable)  
USER ROM  
(4k x 8 bits)  
=
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Table 30 Security bit structure  
The security bits are set as follows for production programmed devices (i.e. programmed by Philips):-  
MEMORY  
SECURITY BITS SET  
USER ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
TEST ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
Verify  
(Enable/Disable)  
PROGRAM ROM  
CHARACTER ROM  
PACKET 26 ROM  
=
=
=
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
Table 31 Security bits for production devices  
The security bits are set as follows for production un-programmed (blank) devices:-  
MEMORY  
SECURITY BITS SET  
USER ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
TEST ROM Programming  
(Enable/Disable)  
Verify  
(Enable/Disable)  
PROGRAM ROM  
CHARACTER ROM  
PACKET 26 ROM  
=
=
=
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
DISABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
ENABLED  
Table 32 Security bits for Blank devices  
2001 Jan 18  
59  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
2001 Jan 18  
60  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF VIDEO PROCESSOR  
Vision IF amplifier  
FM demodulator  
The FM demodulator is realised as narrow-band PLL with  
external loop filter, which provides the necessary  
selectivity without using an external band-pass filter. To  
obtain a good selectivity a linear phase detector and a  
constant input signal amplitude are required. For this  
reason the intercarrier signal is internally supplied to the  
demodulator via a gain controlled amplifier and AGC  
circuit. To improve the selectivity an internal bandpass  
filter is connected in front of the PLL circuit.  
The vision IF amplifier can demodulate signals with  
positive and negative modulation. The PLL demodulator is  
completely alignment-free.  
The VCO of the PLL circuit is internal and the frequency is  
fixed to the required value by using the clock frequency of  
the µ-Controller/Teletext decoder as a reference. The  
setting of the various frequencies (38, 38.9, 45.75 and  
58.75 MHz) can be made via the control bits IFA-IFC in  
subaddress 27H. Because of the internal VCO the IF  
circuit has a high immunity to EMC interferences.  
The nominal frequency of the demodulator is tuned to the  
required frequency (4.5/5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz) by means of a  
calibration circuit which uses the clock frequency of the  
µ-Controller/Teletext decoder as a reference. The setting  
to the wanted frequency is realised by means of the control  
bits FMA/FMB in the control bit 29H.  
QSS Sound circuit  
The sound IF amplifier is similar to the vision IF amplifier  
and has an external AGC decoupling capacitor.  
From the output status bytes it can be read whether the  
PLL frequency is inside or outside the window and whether  
the PLL is in lock or not. With this information it is possible  
to make an automatic search system for the incoming  
sound frequency. This can be realised by means of a  
software loop which switches the demodulator to the  
various frequencies and then select the frequency on  
which a lock condition has been found.  
The single reference QSS mixer is realised by a multiplier.  
In this multiplier the SIF signal is converted to the  
intercarrier frequency by mixing it with the regenerated  
picture carrier from the VCO. The mixer output signal is  
supplied to the output via a high-pass filter for attenuation  
of the residual video signals. With this system a high  
performance hi-fi stereo sound processing can be  
achieved.  
The deemphasis output signal amplitude is independent of  
the TV standard and has the same value for a frequency  
deviation of ±25 kHz at the 4.5 MHz standard and for a  
deviation of ±50 Khz for the other standards.  
The AM sound demodulator is realised by a multiplier. The  
modulated sound IF signal is multiplied in phase with the  
limited SIF signal. The demodulator output signal is  
supplied to the output via a low-pass filter for attenuation  
of the carrier harmonics. The AM signal is supplied to the  
output (AUDOUT/AMOUT) via the volume control.  
Switching between the QSS output and AM output is made  
by means of the AM bit in subaddress 29H (see also  
Table 1).  
2001 Jan 18  
61  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Audio circuit and input signal selection  
CVBS and Y/C input signal selection  
The audio control circuit contains an audio switch with 1  
external input and a volume control circuit. The selection  
of the various inputs is made by means of the ADX bit. In  
various versions the Automatic Volume Levelling (AVL)  
function can be activated. The pin to which the external  
capacitor has to be connected depends on the IC version.  
For the 90° types the capacitor is connected to the EW  
output pin. For the 110° types a choice must be made  
between the AVL function and a sub-carrier output for  
comb filter applications. This choice is made via the  
CBM0/1 bits (in subaddress 22H). When the AVL is active  
it automatically stabilises the audio output signal to a  
certain level.  
The circuit has 2 inputs for external CVBS signals and one  
input can also be used as one Y/C input (see Fig. 27).  
It is possible to supply the selected CVBS signal to the  
demodulated IF video output pin. This mode is selected by  
means of the SVO bit in subaddress 22H. The vision IF  
amplifier is switched off in this mode.  
The video ident circuit can be connected to the incoming  
‘internal’ video signal or to the selected signal. This ident  
circuit is independent of the synchronisation and can be  
used to switch the time-constant of the horizontal PLL  
depending on the presence of a video signal (via the VID  
bit). In this way a very stable OSD can be realised.  
It is possible to use the deemphasis pin as additional audio  
input. In that case the internal signal must, of course, be  
switched off. This can be realised by means of the sound  
mute bit (SM in subaddress 29H). When the IF circuit is  
switched to positive modulation the internal signal on the  
deemphasis pin is automatically muted.  
The subcarrier output is combined with a 3-level output  
switch (0 V, 2.3 V and 4.5 V). The output level and the  
availability of the subcarrier signal is controlled by the  
CMB1 and CMB0 bits. The output can be used to switch  
sound traps etc. It is also possible to use this pin for the  
connection of the AVL capacitor or as AM output.  
TO LUMA/SYNC PROCESSING  
TO CHROMA PROCESSING  
IDENT  
VIM  
(+)  
VIDEO IDENT  
IFVO  
SVO  
C
CVBS2/Y  
CVBS1  
IFVO/SVO  
Fig.27 CVBS switch and interfacing of video ident  
2001 Jan 18  
62  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Synchronisation circuit  
Chroma, luminance and feature processing  
The IC contains separator circuits for the horizontal and  
vertical sync pulses and a data-slicing circuit which  
extracts the digital teletext data from the analog signal.  
The chroma band-pass and trap circuits (including the  
SECAM cloche filter) are realised by means of gyrators  
and are tuned to the right frequency by comparing the  
tuning frequency with the reference frequency of the  
colour decoder. The luminance delay line and the delay  
cells for the peaking circuit are also realised with gyrators.  
The horizontal drive signal is obtained from an internal  
VCO which is running at a frequency of 25 MHz. This  
oscillator is stabilised to this frequency by using a 12 MHz  
signal coming from the reference oscillator of the  
µ-Controller.  
The circuit contains the following picture improvement  
features:  
Peaking control circuit. The ratio of the positive and  
negative overshoots of the peaking can be adjusted by  
means of the bits RPO1/RPO0 in subaddress 2EH.  
The horizontal drive is switched on and off via the soft  
start/stop procedure. This function is realised by means of  
variation of the TON of the horizontal drive pulses. In  
addition the horizontal drive circuit has a ‘low-power  
start-up’ function.  
Black stretch. This function corrects the black level for  
incoming signals which have a difference between the  
black level and the blanking level.  
The vertical synchronisation is realised by means of a  
divider circuit. The vertical ramp generator needs an  
external resistor and capacitor. For the vertical drive a  
differential output current is available. The outputs must be  
DC coupled to the vertical output stage.  
In the types which are intended for 90° picture tubes the  
following geometry parameters can be adjusted:  
Horizontal shift  
Vertical amplitude  
Vertical slope  
S-correction  
Vertical shift  
The types which are intended to be used in combination  
with 110° picture tubes have an East-West control circuit  
in stead of the AVL function. The additional controls for  
these types are:  
EW width  
EW parabola width  
EW upper and lower corner parabola correction  
EW trapezium correction  
Vertical zoom  
horizontal parallelogram and bow correction.  
When the vertical amplitude is compressed (zoom  
factor <1) it is still possible to display the black current  
measuring lines in the overscan. This function is activated  
by means of the bit OSVE in subaddress 26H.  
2001 Jan 18  
63  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Colour decoder  
is realised by means of the OPC bit in subaddress 2BH.  
When used as one-point control loop the system will  
control the black level of the RGB output signals to the  
‘low’ reference current and not on the cut off point of the  
cathode. In this way spreads in the picture tube  
characteristics will no take into account. A further  
consequence is that the RGB output signals have a fixed  
amplitude (2 VP-P under nominal conditions) and that the  
‘cathode drive level’ bits (CL3-CL0) have no effect on  
these amplitudes. For this reason the gain of the RGB  
output stages has to be adapted to the required drive level  
of the cathodes.  
The ICs can decode PAL, SECAM and NTSC signals. The  
PAL/NTSC decoder does not need external reference  
crystals but has an internal clock generator which is  
stabilised to the required frequency by using the 12 MHz  
clock signal from the reference oscillator of the  
µ-Controller.  
Under bad-signal conditions (e.g. VCR-playback in feature  
mode), it may occur that the colour killer is activated  
although the colour PLL is still in lock. When this killing  
action is not wanted it is possible to overrule the colour  
killer by forcing the colour decoder to the required standard  
and to activate the FCO-bit (Forced Colour On) in  
subaddress 21H.  
A black level off-set can be made with respect to the level  
which is generated by the black current stabilization  
system. In this way different colour temperatures can be  
obtained for the bright and the dark part of the picture.  
In the Vg2 adjustment mode (AVG = 1) the black current  
stabilization system checks the output level of the 3  
channels and indicates whether the black level of the  
highest output is in a certain window (WBC-bit) or below or  
above this window (HBC-bit). This indication can be read  
from the status byte 01 and can be used for automatic  
adjustment of the Vg2 voltage during the production of the  
TV receiver. During this test the vertical scan remains  
active so that the indication of the 2 bits can be made  
visible on the TV screen.  
The Automatic Colour Limiting (ACL) circuit (switchable  
via the ACL bit in subaddress 20H) prevents that  
oversaturation occurs when PAL/NTSC signals with a high  
chroma-to-burst ratio are received. The ACL circuit is  
designed such that it only reduces the chroma signal and  
not the burst signal. This has the advantage that the colour  
sensitivity is not affected by this function.  
The SECAM decoder contains an auto-calibrating PLL  
demodulator which has two references, viz: the divided 12  
MHz reference frequency (obtained from the µ-Controller)  
which is used to tune the PLL to the desired free-running  
frequency and the bandgap reference to obtain the correct  
absolute value of the output signal. The VCO of the PLL is  
calibrated during each vertical blanking period, when the  
IC is in search or SECAM mode.  
The control circuit contains a beam current limiting circuit  
and a peak white limiting circuit. To prevent that the peak  
white limiting circuit reacts on the high frequency content  
of the video signal a low-pass filter is inserted in front of the  
peak detector.  
The base-band delay line (TDA 4665 function) is  
integrated. This delay line is also active during NTSC to  
obtain a good suppression of cross colour effects. The  
demodulated colour difference signals are internally  
supplied to the delay line.  
During switch-off of the TV receiver a fixed beam current  
is generated by the black current control circuit. This  
current ensures that the picture tube capacitance is  
discharged. During the switch-off period the vertical  
deflection can be placed in an overscan position so that  
the discharge is not visible on the screen.  
RGB output circuit and black-current stabilization  
In the RGB control circuit the signal is controlled on  
contrast, brightness and saturation. The ICs have a linear  
input for external RGB/YUV signals. Switching between  
RGB and the YUV mode can be realised via the YUV bit in  
subaddress 2BH. The signals for OSD and text are  
internally supplied to the control circuit. The output signal  
has an amplitude of about 2 V black-to-white at nominal  
input signals and nominal settings of the various controls.  
A wide blanking pulse can be activated in the RGB outputs  
by means of the HBL bit in subaddress 2BH. The timing of  
this blanking can be adjusted by means of the bits WBF/R  
bits in subaddress 03H.  
To obtain an accurate biasing of the picture tube the  
‘Continuous Cathode Calibration’ (CCC) system has been  
included in these ICs. When required the operation of the  
CCC system can be changed into a one-point black  
current system. The switching between the 2 possibilities  
2001 Jan 18  
64  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
SOFTWARE CONTROL  
The CPU communicates with the peripheral functions  
using Special function Registers (SFRs) which are  
handbook, halfpage  
A6  
A5  
0
A4  
0
A3  
0
A2  
1
A1  
0
A0 R/W  
addressed as RAM locations. The registers for the  
Teletext decoder appear as normal SFRs in the  
µ-Controller memory map and are written to these  
functions by using a serial bus. This bus is controlled by  
dedicated hardware which uses a simple handshake  
system for software synchronisation.  
1
1
1/0  
MLA743  
Fig.28 Slave address (8A)  
For compatibility reasons and possible re-use of software  
blocks, the I2C-bus control for the TV processor is  
organised as in the stand-alone TV signal processors. The  
TV processor registers cannot be read, so when the  
content of these registers is needed in the software, a copy  
should be stored in Auxiliary RAM or Non Volatile RAM.  
The slave address of the TV signal processor is given in  
Fig.28.  
Valid subaddresses: 05H to 2EH, subaddress FE and FF  
are reserved for test purposes. Auto-increment mode  
available for subaddresses.  
2001 Jan 18  
65  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
DESCRIPTION OF THE I2C-BUS SUBADDRESSES  
Table 33 Inputs TV-processor  
DATA BYTE  
POR  
SUBADDR  
FUNCTION  
(HEX)  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0 Value  
Off-set IF demodulator  
Horizontal parallelogram (1)  
Horizontal bow (1)  
Hue  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0D  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
2A  
2B  
2C  
2D  
2E  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PF1  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PF0  
0
0
0
0
0
0
CM2  
0
0
0
HP2  
0
AFN  
IFB  
0
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
0
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
0
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
YD3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
A3  
MAT  
0
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
YD2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
A2  
MUS  
0
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
YD1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
A1  
ACL  
BPS  
INB  
0
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
YD0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
A0  
20  
20  
20  
00  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
00  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
00  
Horizontal shift (HS)  
EW width (EW) (1)  
EW parabola/width (PW) (1)  
EW upper corner parabola(1)  
EW lower corner parabola(1)  
EW trapezium (TC) (1)  
Vertical slope (VS)  
Vertical amplitude (VA)  
S-correction (SC)  
Vertical shift (VSH)  
Vertical zoom (VX) (1)  
Black level offset R  
Black level offset G  
White point R  
White point G  
White point B  
Peaking  
Luminance delay time  
Brightness  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
A5  
CM1  
0
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
CM0  
0
Saturation  
Contrast  
AGC take-over  
Volume control  
Colour decoder 0  
Colour decoder 1  
AV-switch 0  
0
CM3  
0
A0  
CB  
FCO  
0
RGBL  
VID  
NCIN  
HCO(1)  
SVO  
0
CMB1 CMB0  
INA  
0
STB  
AV-switch 1  
0
0
0
0
0
POC  
Synchronisation 0  
Synchronisation 1  
Deflection  
Vision IF 0  
Vision IF 1  
Sound 0  
Control 0  
Control 1  
Sound 1  
FOA  
FSL  
DFL  
IFC  
0
FOB  
OSO  
XDT  
VSW  
IFLH  
VIM  
DL  
EVG  
IFS  
FORF FORS  
SBL AVG  
MOD AFW  
0
SM0  
CL3  
0
0
IFA  
SIF  
AGN  
0
0
0
STM  
FFI  
AGC1 AGC0  
SM1 FMWS AM(3)  
0
CL2  
YUV  
AVL(2)  
0
FMB  
CL1  
0
0
0
FMA  
CL0  
IE2  
IVG  
0
0
0
RBL  
0
ADX  
0
AKB  
0
0
0
HBL(1) 00  
0
0
0
0
BKS  
0
00  
00  
00  
Features 0  
Features 1  
0
0
RPO1 RPO0  
0
0
Note  
1. These functions are only available in versions which have the East-West drive output.  
2. The AVL function is only available in versions which have no East-West output or when the subcarrier output is used  
for the connection of the AVL capacitor (via the bits CMB1 and CMB0 in subaddress 22H).  
3. Only available in types with QSS sound IF circuit and AM demodulator.  
2001 Jan 18  
66  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 34 Outputs TV-processor  
DATA BYTE  
FUNCTION  
SUBADDR  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Output status bytes  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
POR  
XPR  
SUP  
ID7  
IFI  
NDF  
X
LOCK  
FSI  
X
SL  
IVW  
QSS  
ID4  
X
CD3  
WBC  
AFA  
ID3  
CD2  
HBC  
AFB  
ID2  
X
CD1  
BCF  
FMW  
ID1  
CD0  
IN2  
FML  
ID0  
X
ID6  
SN0  
ID5  
X
SN1  
X
X
Explanation input control data TV-processor  
Table 39 Horizontal shift  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
Table 35 Off-set IF demodulator  
0
2 µs  
0
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
negative correction  
20  
3F  
0
+2 µs  
20  
3F  
no correction  
positive correction  
Table 40 EW width  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
Table 36 Horizontal parallelogram  
0
output current 700 µA  
output current 0 µA  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
screen top 0.5 µs delayed and screen  
3F  
0
bottom 0.5 µs advanced with respect  
to centre  
Table 41 EW parabola/width  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
output current 0 µA  
20  
3F  
no correction  
0
screen top 0.5 µs advanced and  
screen bottom 0.5 µs delayed with  
respect to centre  
3F  
output current 440 µA at top and  
bottom of screen  
Table 37 Horizontal bow  
Table 42 EW upper/lower corner parabola  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
0
screen top and bottom 0.5 µs delayed  
with respect to centre  
0
output current +76 µA  
output current 0 µA  
11  
3F  
20  
3F  
no correction  
output current 207 µA  
screen top and bottom 0.5 µs  
advanced with respect to centre  
Table 43 EW trapezium  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
Table 38 Hue control  
0
output current at top of screen 100 µA  
lower that at bottom  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
0
45°  
0°  
20  
3F  
no correction  
20  
3F  
output current at top of screen 100 µA  
higher than at bottom  
+45°  
2001 Jan 18  
67  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 51 Peaking centre frequency  
Table 44 Vertical slope  
PF1  
0
PF0  
0
CENTRE FREQUENCY  
2.7 MHz  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
correction 20%  
no correction  
correction +20%  
0
0
1
3.1 MHz  
3.5 MHz  
spare  
20  
3F  
1
0
1
1
Table 45 Vertical amplitude  
Table 52 Peaking control (overshoot in direction ‘black’)  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
amplitude 80%  
amplitude 100%  
amplitude 120%  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
depeaking (overshoot 22%)  
no peaking  
0
0
20  
3F  
10  
3F  
overshoot 80%  
Table 46 S-correction  
Table 53 Y-delay adjustment; note 1  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
correction 10%  
no correction  
correction 25%  
YD0 to YD3  
Y-DELAY  
0
YD3  
YD2  
YD1  
YD0  
YD3 × 160 ns +  
YD2 × 80 ns +  
YD1 × 80 ns +  
YD0 × 40 ns  
0E  
3F  
Table 47 Vertical shift  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
Note  
0
shift 5%  
1. For an equal delay of the luminance and chrominance  
signal the delay must be set at a value of 160 ns. This  
is only valid for a CVBS signal without group  
delay distortions.  
20  
3F  
no correction  
shift +5%  
Table 48 Vertical zoom  
Table 54 Brightness control  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
correction 0.7V  
0
amplitude 75%  
amplitude 100%  
amplitude 138%  
0
20  
3F  
20  
3F  
no correction  
correction +0.7V  
Table 49 Black level off-set R/G  
Table 55 Saturation control  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
colour off (52 dB)  
saturation nominal  
saturation +300%  
0
off-set of 160 mV  
no off-set  
0
20  
3F  
17  
3F  
off-set of +160 mV  
Table 50 White point R/G/B  
Table 56 Contrast control  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
0
gain 3 dB  
no correction  
gain +3 dB  
0
RGB amplitude 14 dB  
RGB amplitude nominal  
RGB amplitude +6 dB  
20  
3F  
20  
3F  
2001 Jan 18  
68  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 57 AGC take-over  
Table 60 PAL-SECAM/NTSC matrix  
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
MAT  
MATRIX POSITION  
0
tuner take-over at IF input signal of  
0.4 mV  
0
1
adapted to standard  
PAL matrix  
3F  
tuner take-over at IF input signal of 80  
mV  
Table 61 NTSC matrix  
MUS  
MATRIX POSITION  
Japanese matrix  
USA matrix  
Table 58 Volume control  
0
1
DAC SETTING  
CONTROL  
attenuation 80 dB  
no attenuation  
0
3F  
Table 62 Automatic colour limiting  
ACL  
COLOUR LIMITING  
Table 59 Colour decoder mode, note 1  
0
1
not active  
active  
CM3 CM2 CM1 CM0 DECODER MODE FREQ  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
PAL/NTSC/SECAM  
PAL/SECAM  
PAL  
A
A
A
A
Table 63 Chroma bandpass centre frequency  
CB  
0
CENTRE FREQUENCY  
NTSC  
FSC  
SECAM  
1
1.1 × FSC  
PAL/NTSC  
PAL  
B
B
Table 64 Bypass of chroma base-band delay line  
NTSC  
B
BPS  
DELAY LINE MODE  
PAL/NTSC/SECAM  
PAL/NTSC  
PAL  
ABCD  
C
0
1
active  
bypassed  
C
NTSC  
C
Table 65 Forced Colour-On  
PAL/NTSC  
(Tri-Norma)  
BCD  
FCO  
CONDITION  
0
1
off  
on  
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
PAL/NTSC  
PAL  
D
D
D
NTSC  
Table 66 Selected video out  
Note  
SVO  
CONDITION  
1. The decoder frequencies for the various standards are  
obtained from an internal clock generator which is  
synchronised by a 12 MHz reference signal which is  
obtained from the µ-Controller clock generator.  
0
1
IF video available at output  
selected CVBS available at output  
Table 67 Condition AVL/SNDIF/REFO  
CMB1 CMB0 CONDITION  
These frequencies are:  
a) A: 4.433619 MHz  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
AVL/SNDIF active (depends on SIF bit)  
output voltage 2.3 V + subcarrier;  
output voltage low (<0.8 V)  
b) B: 3.582056 MHz (PAL-N)  
c) C: 3.575611 MHz (PAL-M)  
d) D: 3.579545 MHz (NTSC-M)  
output voltage high (>4.5V)  
2001 Jan 18  
69  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 68 Source select  
Table 76 Forced slicing level for vertical sync  
INA  
INB  
INC  
SELECTED SIGNALS  
CVBS1  
FSL  
SLICING LEVEL  
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
slicing level dependent on noise detector  
fixed slicing level of 60%  
CVBS2  
Y/C  
Table 77 Switch-off in vertical overscan  
Table 69 Blanking of RGB outputs  
OSO  
MODE  
Switch-off undefined  
Switch-off in vertical overscan  
RGBL  
CONDITION  
0
1
0
1
normal operation  
RGB outputs blanked continuously  
Table 78 Forced field frequency  
Table 70 Synchronization of OSD/TEXT display  
FORF  
FORS  
FIELD FREQUENCY  
HP2  
µ-CONTROLLER COUPLED TO  
ϕ1 loop  
ϕ2 loop  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
auto (60 Hz when line not in sync)  
60 Hz  
0
1
keep last detected field frequency  
auto (50 Hz when line not in sync)  
Table 71 Phase 1 (ϕ1) time constant  
Table 79 Interlace  
FOA  
FOB  
MODE  
DL  
STATUS  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
normal  
slow  
0
1
interlace  
de-interlace  
slow/fast  
fast  
Table 80 Vertical divider mode  
Table 72 Synchronization mode  
NCIN  
VERTICAL DIVIDER MODE  
POC  
MODE  
0
1
normal operation  
switched to search window  
0
1
active  
not active  
Table 81 AFC switch  
Table 73 Stand-by  
AFN  
MODE  
STB  
MODE  
0
1
normal operation  
AFC not active  
0
1
stand-by  
normal  
Table 82 Disable flash protection  
Table 74 Video ident mode  
DFL  
MODE  
VIM  
MODE  
0
1
flash protection active  
flash protection disabled  
0
1
ident coupled to internal CVBS (pin 40)  
ident coupled to selected CVBS  
Table 75 Video ident mode  
VID  
VIDEO IDENT MODE  
0
1
ϕ1 loop switched on and off  
not active  
2001 Jan 18  
70  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 83 X-ray detection  
Table 90 Modulation standard  
XDT  
MODE  
MOD  
MODULATION  
0
1
protection mode, when a too high EHT is  
detected the receiver is switched to stand-by  
and the XPR-bit is set to 1  
0
1
negative  
positive  
detection mode, the receiver is not switched  
to stand-by and only the XPR-bit is set to 1  
Table 91 AFC window  
AFW  
AFC WINDOW  
IF SENSITIVITY  
0
1
normal  
Table 84 Service blanking  
enlarged  
SBL  
SERVICE BLANKING MODE  
0
1
off  
on  
Table 92 IF sensitivity  
IFS  
0
1
normal  
Table 85 Adjustment Vg2 voltage  
reduced  
AVG  
MODE  
0
1
normal operation  
Table 93 Search tuning mode  
Vg2 adjustment (WBC and HBC bits in output  
byte 01 can be read)  
STM  
MODE  
0
1
normal operation  
Table 86 Enable vertical guard (RGB blanking)  
reduced sensitivity of video indent circuit  
EVG  
VERTICAL GUARD MODE  
Table 94 Selection external input for sound IF circuit  
0
1
not active  
active  
SIF  
0
MODE  
IF input not selected  
IF input selected (see also table 1)  
Table 87 EHT tracking mode  
1
HCO  
TRACKING MODE  
Table 95 Calibration of IF PLL demodulator  
0
1
EHT tracking only on vertical  
IFLH  
MODE  
calibration system active  
calibration system not active  
EHT tracking on vertical and EW  
0
1
Table 88 PLL demodulator frequency adjust  
IFA  
IFB  
IFC  
IF FREQUENCY  
58.75 MHz  
Table 96 IF AGC speed  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
AGC1  
AGC0  
AGC SPEED  
45.75 MHz  
38.90 MHz  
38.00 MHz  
33.40 MHz  
33.90 MHz  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0.7 × norm  
norm  
3 × norm  
6 × norm  
Table 97 Fast filter IF-PLL  
Table 89 Video mute  
FFI  
CONDITION  
normal time constant  
increased time constant  
VSW  
STATE  
0
1
0
1
normal operation  
IF-video signal switched off  
2001 Jan 18  
71  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 98 Gain FM demodulator  
Table 105 Black current stabilization  
AGN  
MODE  
AKB  
MODE  
0
1
normal operation  
0
1
active  
gain +6 dB, to be used for the demodulation of  
mono signals in the NTSC system  
not active  
Table 106 Cathode drive level (15 steps; 3.5 V/step)  
Table 99 Sound mute  
SETTING CATHODE  
DRIVE AMPLITUDE;  
SM1  
SM0  
CONDITION  
CL3 CL2 CL1 CL0  
0
1
1
1
0
1
see note 1  
mute on  
mute off  
NOTE 1  
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
50 VBL-WH  
75 VBL-WH  
95 VBL-WH  
Note  
1. The mute is activated when the digital acquisition help  
is out-of-window.  
Note  
1. The given values are valid for the following conditions:  
a) - Nominal CVBS input signal  
Table 100Window selection of Narrow-band sound PLL  
b) - Nominal settings for contrast, WPA and peaking  
c) - Black- and blue-stretch switched-off  
FMWS  
FUNCTION  
0
1
small window  
large window  
d) - Gain of output stage such that no clipping occurs  
e) - Beam current limiting not active  
f) The tolerance on these values is about ± 3 V.  
Table 101 Selection QSS out or AM out  
AM  
MODE  
QSS output selected  
AM output selected  
Table 107Activation vertical guard  
0
1
IVG  
MODE  
0
vertical guard connected to black current  
input  
Table 102Nominal frequency FM demodulator  
1
vertical guard connected to BCL input and  
“Peak-White-Limiting” disabled  
FMB  
FMA  
FREQUENCY  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
5.5 MHz  
6.0 MHz  
4.5 MHz  
6.5 MHz  
Table 108 RGB / YUV switch  
YUV  
STATUS  
RGB input activated  
YUV input activated  
0
1
Table 103Enable fast blanking ext.RGB/YUV  
Table 109RGB blanking mode (110° types)  
IE2  
FAST BLANKING  
0
1
not active  
active  
HBL  
MODE  
0
1
normal blanking (horizontal flyback)  
wide blanking  
Table 104 RGB blanking  
RBL  
RGB BLANKING  
0
1
not active  
active  
2001 Jan 18  
72  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 110Audio signal selection  
Explanation output control data TV-processor  
Table 114 Power-on-reset  
ADX  
SELECTED SIGNAL  
0
1
internal audio signal  
external audio signal  
POR  
MODE  
0
1
normal  
power-down  
Table 111Auto Volume Levelling  
Table 115 Output video identification  
AVL  
MODE  
0
1
not active  
active  
IFI  
VIDEO SIGNAL  
0
1
no video signal identified  
video signal identified  
Table 112Black stretch  
Table 116 IF-PLL lock indication  
BKS  
BLACK STRETCH MODE  
0
1
off  
on  
LOCK  
INDICATION  
0
1
not locked  
locked  
Table 113 Ratio pre- and overshoot  
RPO1  
RPO0  
RATIO PRE-/OVERSHOOT  
1 : 1  
Table 117 Phase 1 (ϕ1) lock indication  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
SL  
INDICATION  
1 : 1.25  
1 : 1.5  
1 : 1.8  
0
1
not locked  
locked  
Table 118 Colour decoder mode, note 1  
CD3 CD2 CD1 CD0 STANDARD  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
no colour standard identified  
NTSC with freq. A  
PAL with freq. A  
NTSC with freq. B  
PAL with freq. B  
NTSC with freq. C  
PAL with freq. C  
NTSC with freq. D  
PAL with freq. D  
SECAM  
Note  
1. The values for the various frequencies can be found in  
the note of table 59.  
Table 119 X-ray protection  
XPR  
OVERVOLTAGE  
no overvoltage detected  
overvoltage detected  
0
1
2001 Jan 18  
73  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Table 120 Output vertical guard  
Table 127 Supply voltage indication  
NDF  
VERTICAL OUTPUT STAGE  
SUP  
CONDITION  
0
1
OK  
0
1
supply voltage (8 Volt) not present  
supply voltage (8 Volt) present  
failure  
Table 121 Field frequency indication  
Table 128 Version indication  
FSI  
FREQUENCY  
QSS  
IC VERSION  
0
1
50 Hz  
60 Hz  
0
1
version with intercarrier mono sound circuit  
version with QSS-IF circuit  
Table 122 Condition vertical divider  
Table 129 AFC output  
IVW  
STANDARD VIDEO SIGNAL  
AFA  
AFB  
CONDITION  
0
1
no standard video signal  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
outside window; RF too low  
outside window; RF too high  
in window; below reference  
in window; above reference  
standard video signal (525 or 625 lines)  
Table 123 Indication output black level in/out window  
WBC  
CONDITION  
Table 130 Indication FM-PLL in/out window  
0
1
black current stabilisation outside window  
black current stabilisation inside window  
FMW  
CONDITION  
FM-PLL in window  
FM-PLL out of window  
0
1
Table 124 Indication output black level  
HBC  
CONDITION  
Table 131Indication FM-PLL in/out lock  
0
1
black current stabilisation below window  
black current stabilisation above window  
FML  
CONDITION  
FM-PLL out of lock  
FM-PLL locked  
0
1
Table 125 Condition black current loop  
BCF  
CONDITION  
0
1
black current loop is stabilised  
black current loop is not stabilised  
Table 126 Indication RGB-2 input condition  
IN2  
RGB INSERTION  
0
1
no  
yes  
2001 Jan 18  
74  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
LIMITING VALUES  
In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134).  
SYMBOL  
PARAMETER  
supply voltage  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
VP  
9
V
V
VDD  
supply voltage (all digital  
supplies)  
0.5  
5.0  
VI  
digital inputs  
note 1  
note 1  
0.5  
0.5  
VDD+ 0.5  
VDD+ 0.5  
±10  
V
V
VO  
IO  
digital outputs  
output current (each output)  
DC input or output diode current  
storage temperature  
mA  
mA  
°C  
°C  
°C  
°C  
V
IIOK  
Tstg  
Tamb  
Tsol  
Tj  
±20  
25  
0
+150  
70  
operating ambient temperature  
soldering temperature  
operating junction temperature  
electrostatic handling  
for 5 s  
260  
150  
Ves  
HBM; all pins; notes 2 and 3 2000  
MM; all pins; notes 2 and 4 300  
+2000  
+300  
V
Notes  
1. This maximum value has an absolute maximum of 5.5 V independent of VDD  
2. All pins are protected against ESD by means of internal clamping diodes.  
3. Human Body Model (HBM): R = 1.5 k; C = 100 pF.  
.
4. Machine Model (MM): R = 0 ; C = 200 pF.  
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
SYMBOL  
Rth j-a  
PARAMETER  
VALUE  
UNIT  
thermal resistance from junction to ambient in free air  
35  
K/W  
QUALITY SPECIFICATION  
In accordance with “SNW-FQ-611E”.  
Latch-up  
At an ambient temperature of 70 °C all pins meet the following specification:  
Itrigger 100 mA or 1.5VDD(max)  
Itrigger ≤ −100 mA or ≤−0.5VDD(max)  
.
2001 Jan 18  
75  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
CHARACTERISTICS OF MICRO-COMPUTER AND TEXT DECODER  
VDD = 3.3 V ± 10%; VSS = 0 V; Tamb = 20 to +70 °C; unless otherwise specified  
NUMBER  
Supplies  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
VM.1.1  
VM.1.2  
VM.1.3  
VM.1.4  
supply voltage (VDDA/P/C  
)
3.0  
3.3  
3.6  
V
periphery supply current (IDDP  
)
note 1  
1
mA  
mA  
mA  
core supply current (IDDC  
)
15  
45  
tbf  
tbf  
analog supply current (IDDA  
)
Digital inputs  
RESET  
I.1.1  
I.1.2  
I.1.3  
low level input voltage  
high level input voltage  
0.8  
5.5  
0.7  
V
V
V
2.0  
0.4  
hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger  
input  
I.1.4  
I.1.5  
I.1.6  
input leakage current  
VI = 0  
1
µA  
kΩ  
pF  
equivalent pull down resistance V = VDD  
capacitance of input pin  
33  
10  
Digital input/outputs  
P1.0 TO P1.3, P2.0 TO P2.6 AND P3.0 TO P3.3  
IO.1.1  
IO.1.2  
IO.1.3  
low level input voltage  
high level input voltage  
0.8  
5.5  
0.7  
V
V
V
2.0  
0.4  
hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger  
input  
IO.1.4  
IO.1.5  
IO.1.6  
IO.1.7  
low level output voltage  
high level output voltage  
high level output voltage  
I
OL = 4 mA  
0.4  
5.5  
V
open drain  
IOH = 4 mA  
V
2.4  
V
output rise time (push-pull only) load 100 pF  
10% to 90%  
16  
ns  
IO.1.8  
IO.1.9  
IO.1.10  
output fall time 10% to 90%  
load capacitance  
load 100pF  
14  
ns  
pF  
pF  
100  
10  
capacitance of input pin  
2001 Jan 18  
76  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
P0.5 AND P0.6  
IO.2.1  
IO.2.2  
IO.2.3  
low level input voltage  
high level input voltage  
0.8  
V
2.0  
0.4  
5.5  
0.7  
V
V
hysteresis of Schmitt Trigger  
input  
IO.2.4  
IO.2.5  
IO.2.6  
IO.2.7  
low level output voltage  
high level output voltage  
high level output voltage  
I
OL = 8mA  
0.4  
5.5  
V
open drain  
IOH = 8mA  
V
2.4  
V
output rise time (push-pull only) load 100 pF  
10% to 90%  
16  
ns  
IO.2.8  
IO.2.9  
IO.2.10  
output fall time 10% to 90%  
load capacitance  
load 100pF  
14  
ns  
pF  
pF  
100  
10  
capacitance of input pin  
P1.6 AND P1.7  
IO.3.1  
IO.3.2  
IO.3.3  
low level input voltage (VIL)  
high level input voltage (VIH)  
1.5  
5.5  
V
V
V
3.0  
0.2  
hysteresis of Schmitt-trigger  
input  
IO.3.4  
IO.3.5  
IO.3.6  
low level output voltage  
sink current 8mA  
open drain  
0
0.4  
5.5  
250  
V
high level output voltage  
output fall time (VIH to VIL for CL)  
V
20+0.1×  
ns  
CL  
IO.3.7  
IO.3.8  
bus load capacitance  
capacitance of IO pin  
10  
400  
10  
pF  
pF  
Crystal oscillator  
OSCIN; NOTE 2  
X.1.1  
X.1.2  
X.1.3  
X.1.4  
X.1.5  
resonator frequency  
12  
4.0  
5.0  
MHz  
pF  
pF  
pF  
input capacitance (Ci)  
output capacitance (Co)  
Cx1 = Cx2  
12  
56  
100  
Ri (crystal)  
Note  
1. Peripheral current is dependent on external components and voltage levels on I/Os  
2. The simplified circuit diagram of the oscillator is given in Fig.29.  
A suitable crystal for this oscillator is the Saronix type 9922 520 00169. The nominal tuning of the crystal is important  
to obtain a symmetrical catching range for the PLL in the colour decoder. This tuning can be adapted by means of  
the values of the capacitors Cx1 and Cx2 in Fig.29. Good results were obtained with capacitor values of 39 pF,  
however, for a new application the optimum value should be determined by checking the symmetry of the catching  
range of the colour decoder.  
2001 Jan 18  
77  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
CHARACTERISTICS OF TV-PROCESSORS  
VP = 5 V; Tamb = 25 °C; unless otherwise specified.  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Supplies  
MAIN SUPPLY; NOTE 1  
V.1.1  
V.1.2  
V.1.4  
supply voltage  
total supply current  
total power dissipation  
7.2  
8.0  
8.4  
V
135  
mA  
1085  
mW  
IF circuit  
VISION IF AMPLIFIER INPUTS  
input sensitivity (RMS value)  
note 2  
M.1.1  
M.1.2  
M.1.3  
M.1.4  
M.1.5  
M.1.6  
M.1.7  
fi = 38.90 MHz  
fi = 45.75 MHz  
fi = 58.75 MHz  
note 3  
75  
75  
75  
2
150  
150  
150  
µV  
µV  
µV  
kΩ  
pF  
dB  
mV  
input resistance (differential)  
input capacitance (differential)  
gain control range  
note 3  
3
64  
150  
maximum input signal  
(RMS value)  
PLL DEMODULATOR; NOTES 4 AND 5  
M.2.1  
Free-running frequency of VCO PLL not locked, deviation  
from nominal setting  
500  
+500  
kHz  
M.2.2  
M.2.3  
Catching range PLL  
without SAW filter  
via LOCK bit  
±1  
MHz  
ms  
delay time of identification  
20  
VIDEO AMPLIFIER OUTPUT; NOTES 7 AND 8  
M.3.1  
M.3.2  
M.3.3  
M.3.4  
M.3.5  
zero signal output level  
negative modulation; note 9  
positive modulation; note 9  
negative modulation  
4.7  
2.0  
2.1  
4.5  
0
V
V
V
V
%
top sync level  
white level  
1.9  
2.3  
positive modulation  
difference in amplitude between  
negative and positive modulation  
15  
M.3.6  
M.3.7  
video output impedance  
50  
internal bias current of NPN  
1.0  
mA  
emitter follower output transistor  
M.3.8  
M.3.9  
maximum source current  
5
mA  
bandwidth of demodulated  
output signal  
at 3 dB  
6
7
MHz  
M.3.10  
M.3.11  
differential gain  
note 10  
2
5
5
%
differential phase  
notes 10 and 6  
deg  
2001 Jan 18  
78  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
VIDEO AMPLIFIER (CONTINUED)  
M.3.12  
M.3.13  
M.3.14  
M.3.15  
video non-linearity  
note 11  
5
%
white spot clamp level  
noise inverter clamping level  
5.3  
1.5  
2.8  
V
V
V
note 12  
note 12  
noise inverter insertion level  
(identical to black level)  
intermodulation  
blue  
notes 6 and 13  
Vo = 0.92 or 1.1 MHz  
Vo = 2.66 or 3.3 MHz  
Vo = 0.92 or 1.1 MHz  
Vo = 2.66 or 3.3 MHz  
notes 6 and 14  
weighted  
M.3.16  
M.3.17  
M.3.18  
M.3.19  
60  
60  
56  
60  
66  
66  
62  
66  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
yellow  
signal-to-noise ratio  
M.3.20  
M.3.21  
M.3.22  
M.3.23  
56  
49  
60  
dB  
unweighted  
53  
dB  
residual carrier signal  
note 6  
5.5  
2.5  
mV  
mV  
residual 2nd harmonic of carrier note 6  
signal  
IF AND TUNER AGC; NOTE 15  
Timing of IF-AGC  
M.4.1  
modulated video interference  
30% AM for 1 mV to 100 mV; −  
10  
%
0 to 200 Hz (system B/G)  
M.4.2  
response time to IF input signal positive and negative  
2
ms  
amplitude increase of 52 dB  
modulation  
M.4.3  
M.4.4  
response to an IF input signal  
amplitude decrease of 52 dB  
negative modulation  
positive modulation  
50  
ms  
ms  
100  
Tuner take-over adjustment (via I2C-bus)  
M.5.1  
minimum starting level for tuner  
take-over (RMS value)  
0.4  
0.8  
mV  
mV  
M.5.2  
maximum starting level for tuner  
take-over (RMS value)  
80  
150  
Tuner control output  
M.6.1  
M.6.2  
M.6.3  
maximum tuner AGC output  
voltage  
maximum tuner gain; note 3  
5
8
V
output saturation voltage  
minimum tuner gain;  
IO = 2 mA  
300  
mV  
mA  
maximum tuner AGC output  
swing  
M.6.4  
M.6.5  
leakage current RF AGC  
1
4
µA  
input signal variation for  
complete tuner control  
0.5  
2
dB  
2001 Jan 18  
79  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
AFC OUTPUT (VIA I2C-BUS); NOTE 16  
M.7.1  
M.7.2  
M.7.3  
AFC resolution  
2
bits  
window sensitivity  
125  
275  
kHz  
kHz  
window sensitivity in large  
window mode  
VIDEO IDENTIFICATION OUTPUT (VIA IFI BIT IN OUTPUT BYTE 00)  
M.8.1  
delay time of identification after  
the AGC has stabilized on a new  
transmitter  
10  
ms  
2001 Jan 18  
80  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
QSS Sound IF circuit  
SOUND IF AMPLIFIER  
input sensitivity (RMS value)  
Q.1.1  
Q.1.2  
FM mode (3 dB)  
30  
70  
µV  
AM mode (3 dB)  
60  
100  
µV  
maximum input signal  
(RMS value)  
Q.1.3  
Q.1.4  
Q.1.5  
Q.1.6  
Q.1.7  
Q.1.8  
FM mode  
AM mode  
note 3  
50  
80  
70  
140  
2
mV  
mV  
kΩ  
pF  
input resistance (differential)  
input capacitance (differential)  
gain control range  
note 3  
3
64  
50  
dB  
dB  
crosstalk attenuation between  
SIF and VIF input  
SOUND IF INTERCARRIER OUTPUT; WITH AM = 0  
Q.2.1  
output signal amplitude (RMS  
value)  
SC-1; sound carrier 2 off  
75  
100  
125  
mV  
Q.2.2  
Q.2.3  
bandwidth (-3 dB)  
7.5  
10  
2
MHz  
mV  
residual IF sound carrier (RMS  
value)  
Q.2.4  
Q.2.5  
Q.2.6  
output resistance  
DC output voltage  
300  
2.5  
1.0  
V
internal bias current of emitter  
follower  
mA  
Q.2.7  
Q.2.8  
maximum AC and DC sink  
current  
1.0  
1.0  
mA  
mA  
maximum AC and DC source  
current  
Q.2.9  
weighted S/N ratio (SC1/SC2). black picture  
53/48  
52/47  
44/42  
58/55  
55/53  
48/46  
dB  
dB  
dB  
Ratio of PC/SC1 at vision IF  
Q.2.10  
Q.2.11  
white picture  
input of 40 dB or higher, note 17  
6 kHz sinewave  
(black-to-white modulation)  
Q.2.12  
Q.2.13  
Q.2.14  
250 kHz sine wave  
(black-to-white modulation)  
44/25  
48/30  
51/50  
52/51  
dB  
dB  
dB  
sound carrier subharmonics 45/44  
(f=2.75 MHz ± 3 kHz)  
sound carrier subharmonics 46/45  
(f=2.87 MHz ± 3 kHz)  
2001 Jan 18  
81  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
AM SOUND OUTPUT; DEPENDING ON SETTING OF CMB0/CMB1 AND AM BITS  
Q.3.1  
AF output signal amplitude  
(RMS value)  
54% modulation  
400  
500  
600  
mV  
Q.3.2  
Q.3.21  
Q.3.3  
Q.3.4  
Q.3.5  
Q.3.6  
total harmonic distortion  
total harmonic distortion  
AF bandwidth  
54% modulation  
80% modulation  
3 dB  
0.5  
2.0  
125  
53  
1.0  
5.0  
%
%
100  
47  
kHz  
dB  
V
weighted signal-to-noise ratio  
DC output voltage  
2.5  
40  
power supply ripple rejection  
dB  
FM demodulator and audio amplifier  
FM-PLL DEMODULATOR; NOTE 18  
G.1.2  
G.1.3  
G.1.4  
gain control range AGC amplifier  
26  
30  
dB  
catching range PLL  
note 19  
note 20  
±225  
±100  
kHz  
µA  
maximum phase detector output  
current  
G.1.5  
G.1.6  
VCO steepness fFM/VC (K0)  
3.3  
9
MHz/V  
phase detector steepness  
IC/∆ϕVFM (KD)  
µA/rad  
G.1.7  
AM rejection  
40  
46  
1
dB  
EXTERNAL SOUND IF INPUT (SNDIF, WHEN SELECTED)  
G.1.8  
input limiting for lock-in of PLL  
(RMS value)  
2
mV  
G.1.9  
input resistance  
note 3  
note 3  
50  
kΩ  
G.1.10  
input capacitance  
1.0  
pF  
DE-EMPHASIS OUTPUT; NOTE 22  
G.2.1  
output signal amplitude (RMS  
notes 19 and 21  
500  
mV  
value)  
G.2.2  
G.2.3  
G.2.31  
output resistance  
DC output voltage  
15  
3.2  
50  
kΩ  
V
signal-to-noise ratio (RMS value) note 23  
dB  
AUDIO INPUT VIA DEEMPHASIS OUTPUT; NOTE 22  
G.2.4  
input signal amplitude (RMS  
value)  
500  
mV  
G.2.5  
G.2.6  
input resistance  
15  
9
kΩ  
voltage gain between input and maximum volume  
output  
dB  
2001 Jan 18  
82  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Audio Amplifier  
AUDIO OUTPUT OR VOLUME CONTROLLED AM-OUT  
A.1.1  
controlled output signal  
amplitude (RMS value)  
6 dB; nominal audio input  
signal  
500  
700  
900  
mV  
A.1.2  
A.1.3  
A.1.4  
A.1.6  
A.1.7  
A.1.8  
A.1.10  
A.1.11  
output resistance  
500  
3.6  
DC output voltage  
V
total harmonic distortion  
power supply rejection  
internal signal-to-noise ratio  
external signal-to-noise ratio  
control range  
note 24  
0.5  
%
note 6  
2.5  
50  
60  
80  
80  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
dB  
note 6 + 23 + 26  
note 6 + 26  
see also Fig.30  
suppression of output signal  
when mute is active  
A.1.12  
DC shift of the output when mute  
is active  
10  
50  
mV  
EXTERNAL AUDIO INPUT  
A.2.1  
input signal amplitude (RMS  
500  
2000  
mV  
value)  
A.2.2  
A.2.3  
input resistance  
25  
9
kΩ  
voltage gain between input and maximum volume  
output  
dB  
A.2.4  
crosstalk between internal and  
external audio signals  
60  
dB  
AUTOMATIC VOLUME LEVELLING; NOTE 28  
A.3.1  
A.3.2  
A.3.3  
A.3.4  
A.3.5  
gain at maximum boost  
gain at minimum boost  
charge (attack) current  
discharge (decay) current  
6
dB  
dB  
mA  
nA  
V
-14  
1
200  
1
control voltage at maximum  
boost  
A.3.6  
control voltage at minimum boost  
5
V
2001 Jan 18  
83  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
CVBS, Y/C and RGB/YUV INPUTS  
CVBS-Y/C SWITCH  
S.1.1  
CVBS or Y input voltage  
(peak-to-peak value)  
note 29  
1.0  
1.4  
V
S.1.2  
S.1.3  
CVBS or Y input current  
4
µA  
suppression of non-selected  
CVBS input signal  
notes 6 and 30  
50  
dB  
S.1.4  
chrominance input voltage (burst note 3 and 31  
amplitude)  
0.3  
50  
1.0  
V
S.1.5  
chrominance input impedance  
kΩ  
CVBS OUTPUT ON IFVO2  
S.1.9  
output signal amplitude  
2.0  
V
(peak-to-peak value)  
S.1.10  
S.1.11  
top sync level  
1.8  
V
output impedance  
50  
EXTERNAL RGB / YUV INPUT  
S.2.1  
RGB input signal amplitude for note 32  
0.7  
0.8  
V
V
an output signal of 2 V  
(black-to-white) (peak-to-peak  
value)  
S.2.2  
RGB input signal amplitude  
before clipping occurs  
(peak-to-peak value)  
note 6  
1.0  
S.2.3  
S.2.4  
S.2.5  
S.2.6  
Y input signal amplitude  
(peak-to-peak value)  
input signal amplitude for an  
output signal of 2 V  
(black-to-white); when  
activated via the YUV1/YUV0  
bits; note 33  
1.4/1.0  
2.0  
2.0  
1.5  
20  
V
U/PB input signal amplitude  
(peak-to-peak value)  
1.33/  
+0.7  
V
V/PR input signal amplitude  
(peak-to-peak value)  
1.05/  
+0.7  
V
difference between black level of  
internal and external signals at  
the outputs  
mV  
S.2.7  
S.2.8  
input currents  
no clamping; note 3  
note 6  
0.1  
0
1
µA  
delay difference for the three  
channels  
20  
ns  
2001 Jan 18  
84  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
FAST INSERTION  
S.3.1  
S.3.2  
S.3.3  
S.3.4  
input voltage  
no data insertion  
0.4  
V
data insertion  
insertion  
0.9  
V
maximum input pulse  
3.0  
20  
V
delay time from RGB in to  
RGB out  
data insertion; note 6  
ns  
S.3.5  
delay difference between  
insertion to RGB out and RGB in  
to RGB out  
data insertion; note 6  
20  
ns  
S.3.6  
S.3.7  
input current  
0.2  
mA  
dB  
suppression of internal RGB  
signals  
notes 6 and 30; insertion;  
fi = 0 to 5 MHz  
55  
55  
S.3.8  
suppression of external RGB  
signals  
notes 6 and 30; no insertion;  
fi = 0 to 5 MHz  
dB  
Chrominance and Luminance filters  
CHROMINANCE TRAP CIRCUIT; NOTE 34  
F.1.1  
F.1.2  
F.1.3  
F.1.4  
F.1.5  
trap frequency  
fosc  
2.8  
3.4  
26  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
dB  
Bandwidth at fSC = 3.58 MHz  
Bandwidth at fSC = 4.43 MHz  
colour subcarrier rejection  
3 dB  
3 dB  
24  
trap frequency during SECAM  
reception  
4.3  
MHz  
CHROMINANCE BANDPASS CIRCUIT  
F.2.1  
F.2.2  
F.2.3  
centre frequency (CB = 0)  
fosc  
MHz  
MHz  
centre frequency (CB = 1)  
bandpass quality factor  
1.1×fosc  
3
CLOCHE FILTER  
F.3.1  
centre frequency  
Bandwidth  
4.26  
241  
4.29  
268  
4.31  
295  
MHz  
kHz  
F.3.2  
Y DELAY LINE  
F.4.1  
F.4.2  
F.4.3  
delay time  
note 6  
480  
ns  
tuning range delay time  
8 steps  
160  
+160  
ns  
bandwidth of internal delay line note 6  
8
MHz  
2001 Jan 18  
85  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Picture Improvement Features  
PEAKING CONTROL; NOTE 35  
P.1.1  
P.1.2  
width of preshoot or overshoot  
note 3  
160  
ns  
peaking signal compression  
threshold  
50  
IRE  
P.1.3  
P.1.4  
P.1.5  
overshoot at maximum peaking positive  
45  
80  
1.8  
%
%
negative  
Ratio negative/positive  
overshoot; note 36  
P.1.6  
P.1.7  
P.1.8  
P.1.9  
peaking control curve  
63 steps  
see Fig.31  
peaking centre frequency  
setting PF1/PF0 = 0/0  
setting PF1/PF0 = 0/1  
setting PF1/PF0 = 1/0  
2.7  
3.1  
3.5  
MHz  
MHz  
MHz  
BLACK LEVEL STRETCHER; NOTE 37  
P.2.1  
P.2.2  
P.2.3  
P.2.4  
Maximum black level shift  
15  
1  
1  
6
21  
0
27  
1
IRE  
IRE  
IRE  
IRE  
level shift at 100% peak white  
level shift at 50% peak white  
level shift at 15% peak white  
3
8
10  
2001 Jan 18  
86  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Horizontal and vertical synchronization and drive circuits  
SYNC VIDEO INPUT  
H.1.1  
H.1.2  
H.1.3  
sync pulse amplitude  
note 3  
50  
300  
350  
mV  
slicing level for horizontal sync  
slicing level for vertical sync  
note 38  
note 38  
50  
35  
%
%
HORIZONTAL OSCILLATOR  
H.2.1  
H.2.2  
free running frequency  
15625  
Hz  
%
spread on free running  
frequency  
±2  
H.2.3  
H.2.4  
frequency variation with respect VP = 8.0 V ±10%; note 6  
to the supply voltage  
0.2  
0.5  
80  
%
frequency variation with  
temperature  
T
amb = 0 to 70 °C; note 6  
Hz  
FIRST CONTROL LOOP; NOTE 39  
H.3.1  
H.3.2  
H.3.3  
holding range PLL  
catching range PLL  
±0.9  
±0.9  
24  
±1.2  
kHz  
kHz  
dB  
note 6  
±0.6  
signal-to-noise ratio of the video  
input signal at which the time  
constant is switched  
H.3.4  
hysteresis at the switching point  
3
dB  
SECOND CONTROL LOOP  
H.4.1  
H.4.2  
control sensitivity  
150  
19  
µs/µs  
µs  
control range from start of  
horizontal output to flyback at  
nominal shift position  
H.4.3  
H.4.4  
horizontal shift range  
63 steps  
note 40  
±2  
µs  
control sensitivity for dynamic  
compensation  
7.6  
µs/V  
H.4.5  
Voltage to switch-on the ‘flash’  
protection  
6.0  
V
H.4.6  
H.4.7  
Input current during protection  
1
mA  
control range of the  
parallelogram correction  
note 41  
note 41  
±0.5  
µs  
H.4.8  
control range of the bow  
correction  
±0.5  
µs  
2001 Jan 18  
87  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT; NOTE 42  
H.5.1  
H.5.2  
H.5.3  
H.5.4  
H.5.5  
LOW level output voltage  
IO = 10 mA  
0.3  
V
maximum allowed output current  
maximum allowed output voltage  
duty factor  
10  
mA  
V
VP  
VOUT = LOW (TON  
)
55  
%
switch-on time of horizontal drive  
pulse  
1175  
ms  
H.5.6  
switch-off time of horizontal drive  
pulse  
43  
ms  
FLYBACK PULSE INPUT AND SANDCASTLE OUTPUT  
H.6.1  
required input current during  
flyback pulse  
note 3  
100  
300  
µA  
H.6.2  
output voltage  
during burst key  
during blanking  
4.8  
2.3  
2.6  
5.3  
2.5  
3.0  
5.8  
2.7  
3.4  
V
V
V
H.6.3  
clamped input voltage during  
flyback  
H.6.4  
H.6.5  
H.6.6  
pulse width  
burst key pulse  
3.3  
3.5  
3.7  
µs  
vertical blanking, note 43  
14/9.5  
4.8  
lines  
µs  
delay of start of burst key to start  
of sync  
4.6  
5.0  
VERTICAL OSCILLATOR; NOTE 44  
H.7.1  
H.7.2  
H.7.3  
H.7.4  
free running frequency  
50/60  
Hz  
locking range  
45  
64.5/72 Hz  
divider value not locked  
locking range  
625/525  
lines  
434/488  
722  
lines/  
frame  
VERTICAL RAMP GENERATOR  
H.8.1  
sawtooth amplitude  
VS = 1FH;  
3.0  
V
(peak-to-peak value)  
C = 100 nF; R = 39 kΩ  
H.8.2  
H.8.3  
discharge current  
1
mA  
charge current set by external  
resistor  
note 45  
16  
µA  
H.8.4  
H.8.5  
H.8.6  
vertical slope  
63 steps; see Fig. 47  
f = 60 Hz  
20  
+20  
%
%
V
charge current increase  
LOW level of ramp  
19  
2.3  
VERTICAL DRIVE OUTPUTS  
H.9.1  
differential output current  
VA = 1FH  
0.95  
mA  
(peak-to-peak value)  
common mode current  
output voltage range  
H.9.2  
H.9.3  
400  
µA  
0
4.0  
V
2001 Jan 18  
88  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
EHT TRACKING/OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION  
H.10.1  
H.10.2  
H.10.3  
H.10.4  
H.10.5  
H.10.6  
input voltage  
1.2  
2.8  
V
scan modulation range  
vertical sensitivity  
5  
+5  
%
6.3  
6.3  
%/V  
%/V  
µA  
V
EW sensitivity  
when switched-on  
EW equivalent output current  
overvoltage detection level  
+100  
100  
note 40  
3.9  
DE-INTERLACE  
H.11.1  
first field delay  
0.5H  
EW WIDTH; NOTE 46  
H.12.1  
H.12.2  
H.12.3  
H.12.4  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 50  
100  
0
65  
%
equivalent output current  
EW output voltage range  
EW output current range  
700  
5.0  
µA  
V
1.0  
0
1200  
µA  
EW PARABOLA/WIDTH  
H.13.1  
H.13.2  
control range  
equivalent output current  
63 steps; see Fig. 51  
0
23  
%
EW=3FH; CP=11H; TC=1FH 0  
450  
µA  
EW UPPER/LOWER CORNER/PARABOLA  
H.14.1  
H.14.2  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 52  
46  
+17  
+76  
%
equivalent output current  
PW=3FH; EW=3FH; TC=1FH 207  
µA  
EW TRAPEZIUM  
H.15.1  
H.15.2  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 53  
5  
+5  
%
equivalent output current  
EW=1FH; CP=11H; PW=1FH 100  
+100  
µA  
VERTICAL AMPLITUDE  
H.16.1  
H.16.2  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 46  
SC = 0EH  
80  
120  
%
equivalent differential vertical  
drive output current  
760  
1140  
µA  
(peak-to-peak value)  
VERTICAL SHIFT  
H.17.1  
H.17.2  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 48  
5  
+5  
%
equivalent differential vertical  
drive output current  
50  
+50  
µA  
(peak-to-peak value)  
S-CORRECTION  
H.18.1  
control range  
63 steps; see Fig. 49  
10  
25  
%
VERTICAL ZOOM MODE (OUTPUT CURRENT VARIATION WITH RESPECT TO NOMINAL SCAN); NOTE 47  
H.19.1  
H.19.2  
vertical expand factor  
0.75  
1.38  
output current limiting and RGB  
blanking  
1.05  
2001 Jan 18  
89  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Colour demodulation part  
CHROMINANCE AMPLIFIER  
D.1.1  
D.1.2  
ACC control range  
note 48  
26  
dB  
change in amplitude of the  
output signals over the ACC  
range  
2
dB  
D.1.3  
D.1.4  
threshold colour killer ON  
hysteresis colour killer OFF  
30  
dB  
dB  
strong signal conditions;  
+3  
S/N 40 dB; note 6  
D.1.5  
noisy input signals; note 6  
+1  
dB  
ACL CIRCUIT; NOTE 49  
D.2.1  
chrominance burst ratio at which  
the ACL starts to operate  
3.0  
REFERENCE PART  
Phase-locked loop  
D.3.1  
D.3.2  
catching range  
±500  
Hz  
phase shift for a ±400 Hz  
deviation of the oscillator  
frequency  
note 6  
2
deg  
HUE CONTROL  
D.5.1  
D.5.2  
D.5.3  
hue control range  
63 steps; see Fig.32  
note 6  
±35  
±40  
0
deg  
deg  
deg  
hue variation for ±10% VP  
hue variation with temperature  
Tamb = 0 to 70 °C; note 6  
0
DEMODULATORS  
General  
D.6.3  
spread of signal amplitude ratio note 6  
between standards  
1  
+1  
dB  
D.6.5  
bandwidth of demodulators  
3 dB; note 50  
650  
kHz  
PAL/NTSC demodulator  
D.6.6  
gain between both demodulators  
G(BY) and G(RY)  
1.60  
1.78  
0.1  
1.96  
D.6.12  
D.6.13  
D.6.14  
change of output signal  
amplitude with temperature  
note 6  
note 6  
%/K  
dB  
change of output signal  
amplitude with supply voltage  
±0.1  
±5  
phase error in the demodulated note 6  
signals  
deg  
2001 Jan 18  
90  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
SECAM demodulator  
D.7.1  
D.7.2  
D.7.3  
D.7.4  
D.7.5  
black level off-set  
7
kHz  
pole frequency of deemphasis  
ratio pole and zero frequency  
non linearity  
77  
85  
3
93  
kHz  
3
%
V
calibration voltage  
1.8  
2.3  
2.8  
Base-band delay line  
D.8.1  
variation of output signal for  
adjacent time samples at  
constant input signals  
0.1  
0.1  
5
dB  
D.8.2  
residual clock signal  
(peak-to-peak value)  
mV  
D.8.3  
D.8.4  
D.8.5  
delay of delayed signal  
63.94  
40  
64.0  
60  
64.06  
80  
µs  
ns  
%
delay of non-delayed signal  
difference in output amplitude  
with delay on or off  
5
COLOUR DIFFERENCE MATRICES (IN CONTROL CIRCUIT)  
PAL/SECAM mode; (RY) and (BY) not affected  
D.9.1  
ratio of demodulated signals  
(GY)/(RY)  
0.51  
±10%  
D.9.2  
ratio of demodulated signals  
(GY)/(BY)  
0.19  
±25%  
NTSC mode; the matrix results in the following signals (nominal hue setting)  
MUS-bit = 0  
D.9.6  
(BY) signal: 2.03/0°  
(RY) signal: 1.59/95°  
(GY) signal: 0.61/240°  
2.03UR  
D.9.7  
0.14UR + 1.58VR  
0.31UR 0.53VR  
D.9.8  
MUS-bit = 1  
D.9.9  
(BY) signal: 2.20/1°  
(RY) signal: 1.53/99°  
(GY) signal: 0.70/223°  
2.20UR 0.04VR  
0.24UR + 1.51VR  
0.51UR 0.48VR  
D.9.10  
D.9.11  
REFERENCE SIGNAL OUTPUT/SWITCH OUTPUT; NOTE 51  
D.10.1  
D.10.2  
reference frequency  
CMB1/CMB0 = 01  
CMB1/CMB0 = 01  
3.58/4.43  
MHz  
V
output signal amplitude  
(peak-to-peak value)  
0.2  
0.25  
0.3  
D.10.3  
D.10.4  
D.10.5  
output level (mid position)  
output level LOW  
CMB1/CMB0 = 01  
CMB1/CMB0 = 10  
CMB1/CMB0 = 11  
2.3  
2.5  
2.7  
0.8  
V
V
V
output level HIGH  
4.5  
2001 Jan 18  
91  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
MAX.  
UNIT  
Control part  
SATURATION CONTROL; NOTE 32  
C.1.1  
saturation control range  
63 steps; see Fig.33  
63 steps; see Fig.34  
52  
dB  
CONTRAST CONTROL; NOTE 32  
C.2.1  
C.2.2  
contrast control range  
20  
dB  
dB  
tracking between the three  
channels over a control range of  
10 dB  
0.5  
C.2.6  
contrast reduction  
10  
dB  
V
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL  
C.3.1  
brightness control range  
63 steps; see Fig.35  
±0.7  
2.0  
RGB AMPLIFIERS  
C.4.1  
output signal amplitude  
(peak-to-peak value)  
at nominal luminance input  
signal, nominal settings for  
contrast, white-point  
V
adjustment and cathode drive  
level(CL3-CL0 = 0111)  
C.4.2  
maximum signal amplitude  
(black-to-white)  
note 52  
5.5  
V
C.4.3  
C.4.4  
maximum peak white level  
5.5  
2.1  
V
V
output signal amplitude for the  
‘red’ channel (peak-to-peak  
value)  
at nominal settings for  
contrast and saturation  
control and no luminance  
signal to the input (RY, PAL)  
C.4.5  
C.4.6  
nominal black level voltage  
black level voltage  
2.5  
2.5  
V
V
when black level stabilisation  
is switched-off (via AKB bit)  
C.4.61  
C.4.7  
black level voltage control range AVG bit active; note 53  
1.8  
2.5  
3.2  
V
width of video blanking with HBL note 54  
bit active  
13.4  
13.7  
14.0  
µs  
C.4.71  
C.4.72  
C.4.8  
timing of video blanking with  
respect to mid sync (HBL = 1)  
start of blanking; note 54  
end of blanking; note 54  
3.5  
7.8  
5.9  
10.2  
µs  
µs  
V
control range of the black-current  
stabilisation  
±1  
C.4.81  
C.4.9  
RGB output level when RGBL=1  
blanking level  
0.8  
V
V
V
difference with black level,  
note 52  
0.5  
0.1  
C.4.10  
level during leakage  
measurement  
C.4.11  
C.4.12  
level during ‘low’ measuring  
pulse  
0.25  
0.5  
V
V
level during ‘high’ measuring  
pulse; note 55  
2001 Jan 18  
92  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
C.4.13  
PARAMETER  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
±3  
MAX.  
UNIT  
dB  
adjustment range of the cathode note 52  
drive level  
C.4.131  
gain control range to  
±6  
dB  
compensate spreads in picture  
tube characteristics for the  
2-point black -current  
stabilization system; note 55  
C.4.14  
variation of black level with  
temperature  
note 6  
1.0  
mV/K  
mV  
C.4.141  
black level off-set adjustment on 63 steps  
the Red and Green channel  
±160  
C.4.21  
C.4.22  
C.4.23  
C.4.24  
C.4.25  
C.4.26  
signal-to-noise ratio of the output RGB input; note 56  
60  
50  
dB  
signals  
CVBS input; note 56  
dB  
residual voltage at the RGB  
outputs (peak-to-peak value)  
at fosc  
15  
15  
mV  
mV  
MHz  
MHz  
at 2fosc plus higher harmonics −  
bandwidth of output signals  
RGB input; at 3 dB  
CVBS input; at 3 dB;  
15  
2.8  
f
osc = 3.58 MHz  
CVBS input; at 3 dB;  
osc = 4.43 MHz  
C.4.27  
C.4.28  
3.4  
MHz  
MHz  
f
S-VHS input; at 3 dB  
5
WHITE-POINT ADJUSTMENT  
C.5.1  
C.5.2  
I2C-bus setting for nominal gain HEX code  
20H  
adjustment range of the relative  
R, G and B drive levels  
±3  
dB  
2-POINT BLACK-CURRENT STABILIZATION, NOTES 57  
C.6.1  
amplitude of ‘low’ reference  
current  
8
µA  
µA  
C.6.2  
amplitude of ‘high’ reference  
current; note 55  
40  
C.6.3  
C.6.4  
C.6.5  
C.6.7  
acceptable leakage current  
maximum current during scan  
input impedance  
±75  
2
µA  
mA  
500  
0.1  
minimum input current to  
activate the guard circuit  
IVG bit = “0”, note 58  
mA  
BEAM CURRENT LIMITING  
C.7.1  
C.7.2  
C.7.3  
C.7.4  
contrast reduction starting  
voltage  
2.8  
1.8  
1.7  
0.9  
V
V
V
V
voltage difference for full contrast  
reduction  
brightness reduction starting  
voltage  
voltage difference for full  
brightness reduction  
2001 Jan 18  
93  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
NUMBER  
C.7.5  
PARAMETER  
internal bias voltage  
CONDITIONS  
MIN.  
TYP.  
3.3  
MAX.  
UNIT  
V
C.7.6  
C.7.7  
detection level vertical guard  
IVG bit = “1”; note 58  
IVG bit = “1”; note 58  
3.45  
100  
V
minimum input current to  
activate the guard circuit  
µA  
C.7.8  
maximum allowable current  
1
mA  
FIXED BEAM CURRENT SWITCH-OFF; NOTE 59  
C.8.1  
discharge current during  
switch-off  
0.85  
1.0  
38  
1.15  
mA  
ms  
C.8.2  
discharge time of picture tube  
Notes  
1. When the 3.3 V supply is present and the µ-Controller is active a ‘low-power start-up’ mode can be activated. When  
all sub-address bytes have been sent and the POR and XPR flags have been cleared the horizontal output can be  
switched-on via the STB-bit (subaddress 24H). In this condition the horizontal drive signal has the nominal TOFF and  
the TON grows gradually from zero to the nominal value. As soon as the 8 V supply is present the switch-on procedure  
(e.g. closing of the second loop) is continued.  
2. On set AGC.  
3. This parameter is not tested during production and is just given as application information for the designer of the  
television receiver.  
4. Loop bandwidth BL = 60 kHz (natural frequency fN = 15 kHz; damping factor d = 2; calculated with top sync level as  
FPLL input signal level).  
5. The IF-PLL demodulator uses an internal VCO (no external LC-circuit required) which is calibrated by means of a  
digital control circuit which uses the clock frequency of the µ-Controller as a reference. The required IF frequency for  
the various standards is set via the IFA-IFC bits in subaddress 27H. When the system is locked the resulting IF  
frequency is very accurate with a deviation from the nominal value of less than 25 kHz.  
6. This parameter is not tested during production but is guaranteed by the design and qualified by means of matrix  
batches which are made in the pilot production period.  
7. Measured at 10 mV (RMS) top sync input signal.  
8. Via this pin both the demodulated IF signal and the selected CVBS (or Y+C) signal can be supplied to the output.  
The selection between both signals is realised by means of the SVO bit in subaddress 22H.  
9. So called projected zero point, i.e. with switched demodulator.  
10. Measured in accordance with the test line given in Fig.36. For the differential phase test the peak white setting is  
reduced to 87%.  
The differential gain is expressed as a percentage of the difference in peak amplitudes between the largest and  
smallest value relative to the subcarrier amplitude at blanking level.  
The phase difference is defined as the difference in degrees between the largest and smallest phase angle.  
11. This figure is valid for the complete video signal amplitude (peak white-to-black), see Fig.37.  
12. The noise inverter is only active in the ‘strong signal mode’ (no noise detected in the incoming signal)  
13. The test set-up and input conditions are given in Fig.38. The figures are measured with an input signal of  
10 mV RMS. This test can only be carried out in a test set-up in which the test options of the IC can be activated.  
This because the IF-AGC control input is not available in this IC.  
2001 Jan 18  
94  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
14. Measured at an input signal of 10 mVRMS. The S/N is the ratio of black-to-white amplitude to the black level noise  
voltage (RMS value). B = 5 MHz. Weighted in accordance with CCIR 567.  
15. The time-constant of the IF-AGC is internal and the speed of the AGC can be set via the bits AGC1 and AGC0 in  
subaddress 28H. The AGC response time is also dependent on the acquisition time of the PLL demodulator. The  
values given are valid for the ‘norm’ setting (AGC1-AGC0 = 0-1) and when the PLL is in lock.  
16. The AFC control voltage is generated by the digital tuning system of the PLL demodulator. This system uses the  
clock frequency of the µ-Controller/Teletext decoder as a reference and is therefore very accurate. For this reason  
no maximum and minimum values are given for the window sensitivity figures (parameters M.7.2 and M.7.3). The  
tuning information is supplied to the tuning system via the AFA and AFB bits in output byte 02H. The AFC value is  
valid only when the LOCK-bit is 1.  
17. The weighted S/N ratio is measured under the following conditions:  
a) The vision IF modulator must meet the following specifications:  
Incidental phase modulation for black-to-white jumps less than 0.5 degrees.  
QSS AF performance, measured with the television-demodulator AMF2 (audio output, weighted S/N ratio) better  
than 60 dB (deviation 27 kHz) for 6 kHz sine wave black-to-white modulation.  
Picture-to-sound carrier ratio: PC/SC1 = 13 dB (transmitter).  
b) The measurements must be carried out with the Siemens SAW filters G3962 for vision IF and G9350 for sound  
IF. Input level for sound IF 10 mVRMS with 27 kHz deviation.  
c) The PC/SC ratio at the vision IF input is calculated as the addition of the TV transmitter ratio and the SAW filter  
PC/SC ratio. This PC/SC ratio is necessary to achieve the S/N(W) values as indicated.  
18. Calculation of the FM-PLL filter can be done approximately by use of the following equations:  
K 0 K D  
1
f
=
--------------  
C P  
------  
2π  
o
1
υ =  
----------------------------------  
2R K0KDCP  
BL3dB = f0(1.55 − υ2)  
These equations are only valid under the conditions that υ ≤ 1 and CS >5CP.  
Definitions:  
K0 = VCO steepness in rad/V  
KD = phase detector steepness µA/rad  
R = loop filter resistor  
CS = series capacitor  
CP = parallel capacitor  
f0 = natural frequency of PLL  
BL3dB = loop bandwidth for 3dB  
υ = damping factor  
Some examples for these values are given in table 132  
19. Modulation frequency: 1 kHz, f = ± 50 kHz.  
20. f = 4.5/5.5 MHz; FM: 70 Hz, ± 50 kHz deviation; AM: 1.0 kHz, 30% modulation.  
21. This figure is independent of the TV standard and valid for a frequency deviation of ±25 kHz at a carrier frequency  
of 4.5 MHz or a deviation of ±50 kHz at a carrier frequency of 5.5/6.0/6.5 MHz.  
2001 Jan 18  
95  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
22. The deemphasis pin can also be used as additional audio input. In that case the internal (demodulated FM signal)  
must be switched off. This can be realised by means of the SM (sound mute) bit. When the vision IF amplifier is  
switched to positive modulation the signal from the FM demodulator is automatically switched off. The external signal  
must be switched off when the internal signal is selected.  
23. The signal-to-noise ratio is measured under the following conditions:  
a) Input signal to the SNDIF pin (activated via SIF bit) with an amplitude of 100mVRMS, fMOD = 1 kHz and f = 27 kHz  
b) Output signal measured at the AUDEEM pin. The noise (RMS value) is measured according to the CCIR 468  
definition.  
24. Audio input signal 200 mVRMS. Measured with a bandwidth of 15 kHz and the audio attenuator at 6 dB.  
25. Audio input signal 1 VRMS and the volume control setting such that no clipping occurs in the audio output.  
26. Unweighted RMS value, audio input signal 500 mVRMS, audio attenuator at 6 dB.  
27. Audio attenuator at 20 dB; temperature range 10 to 50 °C.  
28. In various versions the Automatic Volume Levelling (AVL) function can be activated. The pin to which the external  
capacitor has to be connected depends on the IC version. For the 90° types the capacitor is connected to the EW  
output pin. For the 110° types a choice can be made between the AVL function and a sub-carrier output / general  
purpose switch output. The selection must be made by means of the CMB0 and CMB1 bit in subaddress 22H. More  
details about the sub-carrier output are given in the parameters D.10.  
The Automatic Volume Levelling (AVL) circuit stabilises automatically the audio output signal to a certain level which  
can be set by means of the volume control. This AVL function prevents big audio output fluctuations due to variation  
of the modulation depth of the transmitter. The AVL can be switched on and off via the AVL bit in subaddress 29H.  
The AVL is active over an input voltage range (measured at the deemphasis output) of 150 to 1500 mVRMS. The AVL  
control curve is given in Fig.39. The control range of +6 dB to 14 dB is valid for input signals with 50% of the  
maximum frequency deviation.  
29. Signal with negative-going sync. Amplitude includes sync pulse amplitude.  
30. This parameter is measured at nominal settings of the various controls.  
31. Indicated is a signal for a colour bar with 75% saturation (chroma : burst ratio = 2.2 : 1).  
32. The contrast and saturation control is active on the internal signal (YUV) and on the external RGB/YUV input. The  
Text/OSD input can be controlled on brightness only. Nominal contrast is specified with the DAC in position 20 HEX.  
Nominal saturation as maximum 10 dB.  
33. The YUV input signal amplitudes are based on a colour bar signal with 75/100% saturation.  
34. When the decoder is forced to a fixed subcarrier frequency (via the CM-bits) the chroma trap is always switched-on,  
also when no colour signal is identified. In the automatic mode the chroma trap is switched-off when no colour signal  
is identified.  
35. Valid for a signal amplitude on the Y-input of 0.7 V black-to-white (100 IRE) with a rise time (10% to 90%) of 70 ns  
and the video switch in the Y/C mode. During production the peaking function is not tested by measuring the  
overshoots but by measuring the frequency response of the Y output.  
36. The ratio between the positive and negative peaks can be varied by means of the bits RPO1 and RPO0 in  
subaddress 2EH. For ratios which are smaller than 1.8 the positive peak is not affected and the negative peak is  
reduced.  
37. For video signals with a black level which deviates from the back-porch blanking level the signal is “stretched” to the  
blanking level. The amount of correction depends on the IRE value of the signal (see Fig.40). The black level is  
detected by means of an internal capacitor. The black level stretcher can be switched on and off via the BKS bit in  
subaddress 2DH. The values given in the specification are valid only when the luminance input signal has an  
amplitude of 1 Vp-p  
.
2001 Jan 18  
96  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
38. The slicing level is independent of sync pulse amplitude. The given percentage is the distance between the slicing  
level and the black level (back porch). When the amplitude of the sync pulse exceeds the value of 350 mV the sync  
separator will slice the sync pulse at a level of 175 mV above top sync. The maximum sync pulse amplitude is 4 Vp-p  
.
The vertical slicing level is dependent on the S/N ratio of the incoming video signal. For a S/N 24 dB the slicing  
level is 35%, for a S/N 24 dB the slicing level is 60%. With the bit FSL (Forced Slicing Level) the vertical slicing  
level can be forced to 60%.  
39. To obtain a good performance for both weak signal and VCR playback the time constant of the first control loop is  
switched depending on the input signal condition and the condition of the POC, FOA, FOB and VID bits in  
subaddress 24H. The circuit contains a noise detector and the time constant is switched to ‘slow’ when too much  
noise is present in the signal. In the ‘fast’ mode during the vertical retrace time the phase detector current is increased  
50% so that phase errors due to head-switching of the VCR are corrected as soon as possible. Switching of the time  
constant can be automatically or can be set by means of the control bits.  
The circuit contains a video identification circuit which is independent of the first loop. This identification circuit can  
be used to close or open the first control loop when a video signal is present or not present on the input. This enables  
a stable On Screen Display (OSD) when just noise is present at the input.  
To prevent that the horizontal synchronisation is disturbed by anti copy signals like Macrovision the phase detector  
is gated during the vertical retrace period so that pulses during scan have no effect on the output voltage. The width  
of the gate pulse is about 22 µs. During weak signal conditions (noise detector active) the gating is active during the  
complete scan period and the width of the gate pulse is reduced to 5.7 µs so that the effect of noise is reduced to a  
minimum.  
The output current of the phase detector in the various conditions are shown in Table 133.  
40. The ICs have 2 protection inputs. The protection on the second phase detector pin is intended to be used as ‘flash’  
protection. When this protection is activated the horizontal drive is switched-off immediately and then switched-on  
again via the slow start procedure.  
The protection on the EHT input is intended for overvoltage (X-ray) protection. When this protection is activated the  
horizontal drive is directly switched-off (via the slow stop procedure).  
The EHT protection input can also be used to switch-off the TV receiver in a correct way when it is switched off via  
the mains power switch or when the power supply is interrupted by pulling the mains plug. This can be realised by  
means of a detection circuit which monitors the main supply voltage of the receiver. When this voltage suddenly  
decreases the EHT protection input must be pulled HIGH and then the horizontal drive is switched off via the slow  
stop procedure. Whether the EHT capacitor is discharged in the overscan or not during the switch-off period depends  
on the setting of the OSO bit (subaddress 25H, D4). See also note 59.  
41. The control range indicates the maximum phase difference at the top and the bottom of the screen. Compared with  
the phase position at the centre of the screen the maximum phase difference at the top and the bottom of the screen  
is ±0.5 µs for both the parallelogram and the bow correction.  
42. During switch-on the horizontal drive starts-up in a soft-start mode. The horizontal drive starts with a very short TON  
time of the horizontal output transistor, the ‘off time’ of the transistor is identical to the ‘off time’ in normal operation.  
The starting frequency during switch-on is therefore about 2 times higher than the normal value. The ‘on time’ is  
slowly increased to the nominal value in a time of about 1175 ms (see Fig.43). The rather slow rise of the TON  
between 75% and 100% of TON is introduced to obtain a sufficiently slow rise of the EHT for picture tubes with  
Dynamic Astigmatic Focus (DAF) guns. When the nominal frequency is reached the PLL is closed in such a way that  
only very small phase corrections are necessary. This ensures a safe operation of the output stage.  
During switch-off the soft-stop function is active. This is realised by decreasing the TON of the output transistor  
complimentary to the start-up behaviour. The switch-off time is about 43 ms (see Fig.43). When the ‘switch off  
command’ is received the soft-stop procedure is started after a delay of about 2 ms. During the switch-off time the  
EHT capacitor of the picture tube is discharged with a fixed beam current which is forced by the black current loop  
(see also note 59). The discharge time is about 38 ms.  
The horizontal output is gated with the flyback pulse so that the horizontal output transistor cannot be switched-on  
during the flyback time.  
2001 Jan 18  
97  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
43. The vertical blanking pulse in the RGB outputs has a width of 27 or 22 lines (50 or 60 Hz system). The vertical pulse  
in the sandcastle pulse has a width of 14 or 9.5 lines (50 or 60 Hz system). This to prevent a phase distortion on top  
of the picture due to a timing modulation of the incoming flyback pulse.  
44. The timing pulses for the vertical ramp generator are obtained from the horizontal oscillator via a divider circuit.  
During TV reception this divider circuit has 3 modes of operation:  
a) Search mode ‘large window’.  
This mode is switched on when the circuit is not synchronized or when a non-standard signal (number of lines  
per frame outside the range between 311 and 314(50 Hz mode) or between 261 and 264 (60 Hz mode) is  
received). In the search mode the divider can be triggered between line 244 and line 361 (approximately  
45 to 64.5 Hz).  
b) Standard mode ‘narrow window’.  
This mode is switched on when more than 15 succeeding vertical sync pulses are detected in the narrow window.  
When the circuit is in the standard mode and a vertical sync pulse is missing the retrace of the vertical ramp  
generator is started at the end of the window. Consequently, the disturbance of the picture is very small. The  
circuit will switch back to the search window when, for 6 successive vertical periods, no sync pulses are found  
within the window.  
c) Standard TV-norm (divider ratio 525 (60 Hz) or 625 (50 Hz).  
When the system is switched to the narrow window it is checked whether the incoming vertical sync pulses are  
in accordance with the TV-norm. When 15 standard TV-norm pulses are counted the divider system is switched  
to the standard divider ratio mode. In this mode the divider is always reset at the standard value even if the vertical  
sync pulse is missing.  
When 3 vertical sync pulses are missed the system switches back to the narrow window and when also in this  
window no sync pulses are found (condition 3 missing pulses) the system switches over to the search window.  
The vertical divider needs some waiting time during channel-switching of the tuner. When a fast reaction of the  
divider is required during channel-switching the system can be forced to the search window by means of the NCIN bit  
in subaddress 25H.  
When RGB signals are inserted the maximum vertical frequency is increased to 72 Hz. This has the consequence  
that the circuit can also be synchronised by signals with a higher vertical frequency like VGA.  
45. Conditions: frequency is 50 Hz; normal mode; VS = 1F.  
46. The output range percentages mentioned for E-W control parameters are based on the assumption that 400 µA  
variation in E-W output current is equivalent to 20% variation in picture width.  
47. The ICs have a zoom adjustment possibility for the horizontal and vertical deflection. For this reason an extra DAC  
has been added in the vertical amplitude control which controls the vertical scan amplitude between 0.75 and 1.38  
of the nominal scan. At an amplitude of 1.06 of the nominal scan the output current is limited and the blanking of the  
RGB outputs is activated. This is illustrated in Fig. 42.  
a) The nominal scan height must be adjusted at a position of 19 HEX of the vertical ‘zoom’ DAC.  
48. At a chrominance input voltage of 660 mV (p-p) (colour bar with 75% saturation i.e. burst signal amplitude  
300 mV (p-p)) the dynamic range of the ACC is +6 and 20 dB.  
49. The ACL function can be activated by via the ACL bit in the subaddress 20H. The ACL circuit reduces the gain of the  
chroma amplifier for input signals with a chroma-to-burst ratio which exceeds a value of 3.0.  
50. This parameter indicates the bandwidth of the complete chrominance circuit including the chrominance bandpass  
filter. The bandwidth of the low-pass filter of the demodulator is approximately 1 MHz.  
51. The subcarrier output is combined with a 3-level switch output which can be used to switch external circuits like  
sound traps etc. This output is controlled by the CMB1 and CMB0 bits in control byte 22H. The subcarrier signal is  
available when CMB1/0 are set to 0/1. During the demodulation of SECAM signals the subcarrier signal is only  
available during the vertical retrace period. The frequency is 4.43 MHz in this condition. When CMB1/0 are set to 00  
in versions for 90° picture tubes (no EW output) the output is high ohmic.  
2001 Jan 18  
98  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
52. Because of the 2-point black current stabilization circuit both the black level and the amplitude of the RGB output  
signals depend on the drive characteristic of the picture tube. The system checks whether the returning measuring  
currents meet the requirement and adapts the output level and gain of the circuit when necessary. Therefore the  
typical value of the black level and amplitude at the output are just given as an indication for the design of the RGB  
output stage.  
The 2-point black level system adapts the drive voltage for each cathode in such a way that the 2 measuring currents  
have the right value. This has the consequence that a change in the gain of the output stage will be compensated  
by a gain change of the RGB control circuit. Because different picture tubes may require different drive voltage  
amplitudes the ratio between the output signal amplitude and the inserted measuring pulses can be adapted via the  
I2C-bus. This is indicated in the parameter ‘Adjustment range of the cathode drive level’.  
Because of the dependence of the output signal amplitude on the application the soft clipping limiting has been  
related to the input signal amplitude.  
53. The alignment system for the Vg2 voltage of the picture tube can be activated by means of the AVG bit. In that  
condition a certain black level is inserted at the RGB outputs during a few lines. The value of this level can be  
adjusted by means of the brightness control DAC. An automatic adjustment of the Vg2 of the picture tube can be  
realised by using the WBC and HBC bits in output byte 01. For a black level feedback current between 12 and 20 µA  
the WBC = 1, for a higher or lower current WBC = 0. Whether the current is too high or too low can be found from  
the HBC bit. The indication of these bits can be made visible on the screen via OSD so that this alignment procedure  
can also be used for service purposes.  
54. When the reproduction of 4 : 3 pictures on a 16 : 9 picture tube is realised by means of a reduction of the horizontal  
scan amplitude the edges of the picture may slightly be disturbed. This effect can be prevented by adding an  
additional blanking to the RGB signals. The blanking pulse is derived form the horizontal oscillator and is directly  
related to the incoming video signal (independent of the flyback pulse). This blanking is activated with the HBL bit.  
55. This parameter is valid only when the CCC loop is active.  
56. Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) is specified as peak-to-peak signal with respect to RMS noise (bandwidth 5 MHz).  
57. This is a current input. The timing of the measuring pulses and the vertical blanking for the 50/60 Hz standard are  
given in Fig.44  
The start-up procedure is as follows.  
When the TV receiver is switched-on the RGB outputs are blanked and the black-current loop will try to adjust the  
picture tube to the right bias levels. The RGB drive signals are switched-on as soon as the black current loop is  
stabilised. This results in the shortest switch-on time.  
When this switch-on system results in a visible disturbance of the picture it is possible to add a further switch-on delay  
via a software routine. In that case the RGB outputs must be blanked by means of the RBL bit. As soon as the black  
current loop is stabilised the BCF-bit is set to 0 (output byte 01). This information can then be used to switch-on the  
RGB outputs with some additional delay.  
58. The input of the vertical guard function can be connected to the black current measuring input (BLKIN) or to the beam  
current limiting input (BCLIN). The switching between these modes is realised by means of the IVG bit in subaddress  
2BH. When the black current input is chosen it should be noted that for a reliable operation of the protection system  
and the black current stabilization system the end of the protection pulse during normal operation should not overlap  
the measuring pulses (see also Fig.44). Therefore this pulse must end before line 14.  
2001 Jan 18  
99  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
59. During switch-off the magnitude of the discharge current of the picture tube is controlled by the black current loop.  
Dependent on the setting of the OSO bit the vertical scan can be stopped in an overscan position during that time so  
that the discharge is not visible on the screen. The switch-off procedure is as follows:  
a) When the switch-off command is received the RGB outputs are blanked for a time of about 2 ms.  
b) If OSO = 1 the vertical scan is placed in an overscan position  
c) If OSO = 0 the vertical deflection will keep running during the switch-off time  
d) The soft-stop procedure is started with a reduction of the TON of the output stage from nominal to zero  
e) The fixed beam current is forced via the black current loop  
f) The soft-stop time has a value of 43 ms, the fixed beam current is flowing during a time of 38 ms.  
Table 132 Some examples for the FM-PLL filter  
BL3dB (kHz)  
CS (nF)  
CP (nF)  
R (k)  
ν
100  
160  
4.7  
4.7  
820  
330  
2.7  
3.9  
0.5  
0.5  
Table 133 Output current of the phase detector in the various conditions  
I2C-BUS COMMANDS  
IC CONDITIONS  
ϕ-1 CURRENT/MODE  
VID  
POC  
FOA  
FOB  
IFI  
SL  
NOISE  
SCAN  
V-RETR GATING MODE  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
no  
yes  
yes  
no  
yes  
200  
30  
300  
30  
yes (1)  
yes(2)  
no  
normal  
normal  
normal  
slow  
200  
30  
300  
30  
yes(2)  
200  
200  
30  
300  
300  
30  
no  
slow  
no  
yes  
yes(2)  
yes(2)  
yes(1)  
no  
slow/fast  
slow/fast  
fast  
200  
6
300  
6
no  
OSD  
off  
Note  
1. Gating is active during vertical retrace, the width is 22 µs. This gating prevents disturbance due to Macro Vision Anti  
Copy signals.  
2. Gating is continuously active and is 5.7 µs wide  
2001 Jan 18  
100  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
g
m
handbook, halfpage  
1
fosc  
=
----------------------------------------  
Ci × Ctot  
L ×  
---------------------  
2 π  
Co  
i
Ci  
Ci + Ctot  
276  
kΩ  
XTALIN  
XTALOUT  
X
C
a × Cb  
C tot = Cp  
+
-------------------  
C
a + Cb  
crystal  
or  
r
L
R
i
C
i
i
C
p
Ca = Ci + Cx1  
Cb = Co + Cx2  
Cx1  
Cx2  
MGR447  
Fig.29 Simplified diagram crystal oscillator.  
2001 Jan 18  
101  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
%
0
dB  
80  
-20  
60  
40  
20  
-40  
-60  
-80  
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
DAC (HEX)  
20  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
DAC (HEX)  
Overshoot in direction ‘black’.  
Fig. 31 Peaking control curve.  
Fig. 30 Volume control curve  
MLA740 - 1  
300  
%
+50  
(deg)  
250  
+30  
+10  
10  
200  
150  
100  
50  
30  
50  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
DAC (HEX)  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
DAC(HEX)  
Fig.32 Hue control curve.  
Fig. 33 Saturation control curve.  
2001 Jan 18  
102  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
MLA742 - 1  
MLA741 - 1  
0.7  
(V)  
100  
(%)  
90  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0.35  
0
0.35  
0.7  
0
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
0
10  
20  
30  
40  
DAC (HEX)  
DAC (HEX)  
Fig. 34 Contrast control curve.  
Fig. 35 Brightness control curve.  
MBC212  
MBC211  
100%  
92%  
16 %  
100%  
86%  
72%  
58%  
44%  
30%  
30%  
µs  
32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64  
10 12  
22 26  
for negative modulation  
100% = 10% rest carrier  
Fig. 36 Video output signal.  
Fig. 37 Test signal waveform.  
2001 Jan 18  
103  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
3.2 dB  
10 dB  
13.2 dB  
13.2 dB  
30 dB  
30 dB  
SC CC  
PC  
SC CC  
PC  
MBC213  
BLUE  
YELLOW  
PC  
Σ
TEST  
CIRCUIT  
SPECTRUM  
ANALYZER  
SC  
ATTENUATOR  
gain setting  
adjusted for blue  
CC  
MBC210  
Input signal conditions: SC = sound carrier; CC = colour carrier; PC = picture carrier.  
All amplitudes with respect to top sync level.  
VO at 3.58 or 4.4 MHz  
Value at 0.92 or 1.1 MHz = 20 log  
Value at 2.66 or 3.3 MHz = 20 log  
+ 3.6 dB  
------------------------------------------------------------  
VO at 0.92 or 1.1 MHz  
VO at 3.58 or 4.4 MHz  
------------------------------------------------------------  
VO at 2.66 or 3.3 MHz  
Fig. 38 Test set-up intermodulation.  
2001 Jan 18  
104  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
CHARACTERISTIC POINTS AVL  
A
B
C
D
UNIT  
Deemphasis voltage  
FM swing  
150  
15  
300  
30  
500  
50  
1500  
mVRMS  
kHz  
150  
1.8  
1.0  
AVL is OFF  
AVL is ON  
A
D
C
B
100.0m  
10.0m  
1.0  
100.0m  
2.0  
DEEMP  
Fig. 39 AVL characteristic  
2001 Jan 18  
105  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
OUTPUT (IRE)  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
B
INPUT (IRE)  
0
B
100  
40  
60  
80  
20  
A
-20  
A
A-A: MAXIMUM BLACK LEVEL SHIFT  
B-B: LEVEL SHIFT AT 15% OF PEAK WHITE  
Fig. 40 I/O relation of the black level stretch circuit  
2001 Jan 18  
106  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
100  
95  
BLUE  
GREEN (BLS=1)  
RED (BLS=1)  
90  
85  
80  
85  
90  
95  
100  
Peak white level (%)  
Fig.41 Blue stretch characteristic  
2001 Jan 18  
107  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TOP  
PICTURE  
%
60  
50  
138%  
40  
30  
20  
10  
100%  
75%  
TIME  
T/2  
T
0
-10  
-20  
-30  
-40  
-50  
-60  
BOTTOM  
PICTURE  
BLANKING FOR EXPANSION OF 138%  
Fig. 42 Vertical position and blanking pulse for 110° types  
2001 Jan 18  
108  
100  
75  
Soft stop  
Soft start  
TON  
(%)  
50  
43  
57  
73  
1045  
12  
Time (ms)  
Discharge current  
picture tube  
38  
Fig. 43 Soft start and soft stop behaviour of horizontal output and timing picture tube discharge current  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
2001 Jan 18  
110  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
TEST AND APPLICATION INFORMATION  
East-West output stage  
The value of REW must be:  
Vscan  
REW = R ×  
----------------------  
c
In order to obtain correct tracking of the vertical and  
horizontal EHT-correction, the EW output stage should be  
dimensioned as illustrated in Fig.45.  
18 × Vref  
Example: With Vref = 3.9 V; Rc = 39 kand Vscan = 120 V  
then REW = 68 k.  
Resistor REW determines the gain of the EW output stage.  
Resistor Rc determines the reference current for both the  
vertical sawtooth generator and the geometry processor.  
The preferred value of Rc is 39 kwhich results in a  
reference current of 100 µA (Vref = 3.9 V).  
V
b
DD  
HORIZONTAL  
V
scan  
DEFLECTION  
STAGE  
R
ew  
UOC series  
DIODE  
MODULATOR  
V
EW  
15  
EWD  
EW output  
stage  
20  
21  
V
ref  
R
C
c
saw  
39 k  
(2%)  
100 nF  
(5%)  
MLA744 - 1  
I
ref  
Fig.45 East-West output stage  
2001 Jan 18  
111  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
700  
500  
IVERT  
(µA)  
300  
100  
-100  
-300  
-500  
-700  
0
T/2  
TIME  
T
VA = 0, 1FH and 3FH; VSH = 1FH; SC = 0EH.  
VS = 0, 1FH and 3FH; VA = 1FH; VSH = 1FH; SC = 0EH.  
Fig. 46 Control range of vertical amplitude.  
Fig. 47 Control range of vertical slope.  
IVERT  
(µA)  
600  
400  
200  
0
-200  
-400  
-600  
TIME  
T/2  
T  
0
VSH = 0, 1FH and 3FH; VA = 1FH; SC = 0EH.  
SC = 0, 0EH and 3FH; VA = 1FH; VSH = 1FH.  
Fig. 48 Control range of vertical shift.  
Fig. 49 Control range of S-correction.  
2001 Jan 18  
112  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
IEW  
IEW  
(µA)  
500  
(µA)  
1200  
1000  
800  
600  
400  
400  
300  
200  
100  
200  
0
0
0  
0.m  
TIME8.m  
0
TIME  
T
T/2  
T/2
T
0
PW = 0, 1FH and 3FH; EW = 3FH; TC = 1FH; CP = 11H.  
EW = 0, 1FH and 3FH; PW = 3FH; TC = 1FH; CP = 11H.  
Fig. 51 Control range of EW parabola/width ratio.  
Fig. 50 Control range of EW width.  
IEW  
IEW  
(µA)  
(µA)  
650  
600  
500  
400  
300  
200  
100  
0
600  
550  
500  
450  
400  
0
0
TIME  
T
T/2  
0.0  
400.0m  
800.0m  
350  
1
TIME  
T/2  
T
0
CP = 0, 11H and 3FH; EW = 3FH; PW = 3FH; TC = 1FH.  
TC = 0, 1FH and 3FH; EW = 1FH; PW = 1FH; CP = 11H.  
Fig. 52 Control range of EW corner/parabola ratio.  
Fig. 53 Control range of EW trapezium correction.  
2001 Jan 18  
113  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
Adjustment of geometry control parameters  
The first method is recommended for picture tubes that  
have a marking for the middle of the screen. With the  
vertical shift control the last line of the visible picture is  
positioned exactly in the middle of the screen. After this  
adjustment the vertical shift should not be changed. The  
top of the picture is placed by adjustment of the vertical  
amplitude, and the bottom by adjustment of the vertical  
slope.  
The deflection processor offers 5 control parameters for  
picture alignment, viz:  
S-correction  
vertical amplitude  
vertical slope  
vertical shift  
The second method is recommended for picture tubes that  
have no marking for the middle of the screen. For this  
method a video signal is required in which the middle of the  
picture is indicated (e.g. the white line in the circle test  
pattern). With the vertical slope control the beginning of the  
blanking is positioned exactly on the middle of the picture.  
Then the top and bottom of the picture are placed  
symmetrical with respect to the middle of the screen by  
adjustment of the vertical amplitude and vertical shift.  
After this adjustment the vertical shift has the right setting  
and should not be changed.  
horizontal shift.  
The 110° types offer in addition:  
EW width  
EW parabola width  
EW upper/lower corner parabola  
EW trapezium correction.  
Vertical zoom  
Horizontal parallelogram and bow correction  
It is important to notice that the ICs are designed for use  
with a DC-coupled vertical deflection stage. This is the  
reason why a vertical linearity alignment is not necessary  
(and therefore not available).  
If the vertical shift alignment is not required VSH should be  
set to its mid-value (i.e. VSH = 1F). Then the top of the  
picture is placed by adjustment of the vertical amplitude  
and the bottom by adjustment of the vertical slope. After  
the vertical picture alignment the picture is positioned in  
the horizontal direction by adjustment of the EW width and  
the horizontal shift. Finally (if necessary) the left- and  
right-hand sides of the picture are aligned in parallel by  
adjusting the EW trapezium control.  
For a particular combination of picture tube type, vertical  
output stage and EW output stage it is determined which  
are the required values for the settings of S-correction, EW  
parabola/width ratio and EW corner/parabola ratio. These  
parameters can be preset via the I2C-bus, and do not need  
any additional adjustment. The rest of the parameters are  
preset with the mid-value of their control range (i.e. 1FH),  
or with the values obtained by previous TV-set  
adjustments.  
To obtain the full range of the vertical zoom function the  
adjustment of the vertical geometry should be carried out  
at a nominal setting of the zoom DAC at position 19 HEX.  
The vertical shift control is meant for compensation of  
off-sets in the external vertical output stage or in the  
picture tube. It can be shown that without compensation  
these off-sets will result in a certain linearity error,  
especially with picture tubes that need large S-correction.  
The total linearity error is in first order approximation  
proportional to the value of the off-set, and to the square of  
the S-correction needed. The necessity to use the vertical  
shift alignment depends on the expected off-sets in vertical  
output stage and picture tube, on the required value of the  
S-correction, and on the demands upon vertical linearity.  
For adjustment of the vertical shift and vertical slope  
independent of each other, a special service blanking  
mode can be entered by setting the SBL bit HIGH. In this  
mode the RGB-outputs are blanked during the second half  
of the picture. There are 2 different methods for alignment  
of the picture in vertical direction. Both methods make use  
of the service blanking mode.  
2001 Jan 18  
114  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
PACKAGE OUTLINE  
SDIP64: plastic shrink dual in-line package; 64 leads (750 mil)  
SOT274-1  
D
M
E
A
2
A
L
A
1
c
e
(e )  
1
w M  
Z
b
1
M
H
b
64  
33  
pin 1 index  
E
1
32  
0
5
10 mm  
scale  
DIMENSIONS (mm are the original dimensions)  
(1)  
A
max.  
A
A
2
max.  
(1)  
(1)  
Z
1
w
UNIT  
b
b
c
D
E
e
e
L
M
M
H
1
1
E
min.  
max.  
1.3  
0.8  
0.53  
0.40  
0.32  
0.23  
58.67  
57.70  
17.2  
16.9  
3.2  
2.8  
19.61  
19.05  
20.96  
19.71  
mm  
0.51  
4.57  
5.84  
1.778  
19.05  
0.18  
1.73  
Note  
1. Plastic or metal protrusions of 0.25 mm maximum per side are not included.  
REFERENCES  
OUTLINE  
EUROPEAN  
PROJECTION  
ISSUE DATE  
VERSION  
IEC  
JEDEC  
EIAJ  
92-10-13  
95-02-04  
SOT274-1  
2001 Jan 18  
115  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
SOLDERING  
Introduction  
Reflow soldering requires solder paste (a suspension of  
fine solder particles, flux and binding agent) to be applied  
to the printed-circuit board by screen printing, stencilling or  
pressure-syringe dispensing before package placement.  
There is no soldering method that is ideal for all IC  
packages. Wave soldering is often preferred when  
through-hole and surface mounted components are mixed  
on one printed-circuit board. However, wave soldering is  
not always suitable for surface mounted ICs, or for  
printed-circuits with high population densities. In these  
situations reflow soldering is often used.  
Several methods exist for reflowing; for example,  
infrared/convection heating in a conveyor type oven.  
Throughput times (preheating, soldering and cooling) vary  
between 50 and 300 seconds depending on heating  
method. Typical reflow peak temperatures range from  
215 to 250 °C.  
This text gives a very brief insight to a complex technology.  
A more in-depth account of soldering ICs can be found in  
our “IC package Databook” (order code 9398 652 90011).  
WAVE SOLDERING  
Wave soldering is not recommended for QFP packages.  
This is because of the likelihood of solder bridging due to  
closely-spaced leads and the possibility of incomplete  
solder penetration in multi-lead devices.  
SDIP  
SOLDERING BY DIPPING OR BY WAVE  
The maximum permissible temperature of the solder is  
260 °C; solder at this temperature must not be in contact  
with the joint for more than 5 seconds. The total contact  
time of successive solder waves must not exceed  
5 seconds.  
If wave soldering cannot be avoided, for QFP  
packages with a pitch (e) larger than 0.5 mm, the  
following conditions must be observed:  
A double-wave (a turbulent wave with high upward  
pressure followed by a smooth laminar wave)  
soldering technique should be used.  
The device may be mounted up to the seating plane, but  
the temperature of the plastic body must not exceed the  
specified maximum storage temperature (Tstg max). If the  
printed-circuit board has been pre-heated, forced cooling  
may be necessary immediately after soldering to keep the  
temperature within the permissible limit.  
The footprint must be at an angle of 45° to the board  
direction and must incorporate solder thieves  
downstream and at the side corners.  
During placement and before soldering, the package must  
be fixed with a droplet of adhesive. The adhesive can be  
applied by screen printing, pin transfer or syringe  
dispensing. The package can be soldered after the  
adhesive is cured.  
REPAIRING SOLDERED JOINTS  
Apply a low voltage soldering iron (less than 24 V) to the  
lead(s) of the package, below the seating plane or not  
more than 2 mm above it. If the temperature of the  
soldering iron bit is less than 300 °C it may remain in  
contact for up to 10 seconds. If the bit temperature is  
between 300 and 400 °C, contact may be up to 5 seconds.  
Maximum permissible solder temperature is 260 °C, and  
maximum duration of package immersion in solder is  
10 seconds, if cooled to less than 150 °C within  
6 seconds. Typical dwell time is 4 seconds at 250 °C.  
A mildly-activated flux will eliminate the need for removal  
of corrosive residues in most applications.  
QFP  
REFLOW SOLDERING  
REPAIRING SOLDERED JOINTS  
Reflow soldering techniques are suitable for all QFP  
packages.  
Fix the component by first soldering two diagonally-  
opposite end leads. Use only a low voltage soldering iron  
(less than 24 V) applied to the flat part of the lead. Contact  
time must be limited to 10 seconds at up to 300 °C. When  
using a dedicated tool, all other leads can be soldered in  
one operation within 2 to 5 seconds between  
270 and 320 °C.  
The choice of heating method may be influenced by larger  
plastic QFP packages (44 leads, or more). If infrared or  
vapour phase heating is used and the large packages are  
not absolutely dry (less than 0.1% moisture content by  
weight), vaporization of the small amount of moisture in  
them can cause cracking of the plastic body. For details,  
refer to the Drypack information in our “Quality Reference  
Handbook” (order code 9397 750 00192).  
2001 Jan 18  
116  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
DEFINITIONS  
Data sheet status  
Objective specification  
Preliminary specification  
Product specification  
This data sheet contains target or goal specifications for product development.  
This data sheet contains preliminary data; supplementary data may be published later.  
This data sheet contains final product specifications.  
Limiting values  
Limiting values given are in accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 134). Stress above one or  
more of the limiting values may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only and operation  
of the device at these or at any other conditions above those given in the Characteristics sections of the specification  
is not implied. Exposure to limiting values for extended periods may affect device reliability.  
Application information  
Where application information is given, it is advisory and does not form part of the specification.  
LIFE SUPPORT APPLICATIONS  
These products are not designed for use in life support appliances, devices, or systems where malfunction of these  
products can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Philips customers using or selling these products for  
use in such applications do so at their own risk and agree to fully indemnify Philips for any damages resulting from such  
improper use or sale.  
PURCHASE OF PHILIPS I2C COMPONENTS  
Purchase of Philips I2C components conveys a license under the Philips’ I2C patent to use the  
components in the I2C system provided the system conforms to the I2C specification defined by  
Philips. This specification can be ordered using the code 9398 393 40011.  
2001 Jan 18  
117  
Philips Semiconductors  
Tentative Device Specification  
TV signal processor-Teletext decoder with  
embedded µ-Controller  
TDA935X/6X/8X PS/N2 series  
2001 Jan 18  
118  

相关型号:

TDA9400

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR TV AND RADIO RECEVERS
ETC

TDA9403

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR TV AND RADIO RECEVERS
ETC

TDA9500

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR TV AND RADIO RECEVERS
ETC

TDA9501

AC COUPLING HIGH VOLTAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER
STMICROELECTR

TDA9502

3 CHANNEL, VIDEO AMPLIFIER, PZFM15, MULTIWATT-15
STMICROELECTR

TDA9503

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR TV AND RADIO RECEVERS
ETC

TDA9503-DP

Consumer Circuit, Bipolar, PDIP16
DYNEX

TDA9511

DC COUPLING HIGH VOLTAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER
STMICROELECTR

TDA9513

INTEGRATED CIRCUITS FOR TV AND RADIO RECEVERS
ETC

TDA9530

9.5NS TRIPLE HIGH VOLTAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER
STMICROELECTR

TDA9533

7.5NS TRIPLE HIGH VOLTAGE VIDEO AMPLIFIER
STMICROELECTR